Pacifica and Voyager
OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual
that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without
imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.)
or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................9
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................125
4SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................152
5STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................219
6IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................301
7SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................345
8TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................388
9MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................397
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................499
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................503
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL................................10
Essential Information ..................................10
Symbols ........................................................ 10
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ........11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ...............12
KEYS ......................................................................13
Key Fob......................................................... 13
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................18
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition..................... 18
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...19
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 20
Remote Start Cancel Message —
If Equipped ................................................... 20
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 21
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle .................................................. 21
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle .......................................................... 21
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 21
General Information .................................... 22
SENTRY KEY.......................................................... 22
Key Programming ....................................... 23
Replacement Keys....................................... 23
General Information .................................... 23
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED..... 24
To Arm The System ..................................... 24
To Disarm The System ................................ 24
Rearming Of The System............................. 25
DOORS................................................................... 25
Manual Lock ................................................ 25
Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped............ 26
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped ...................................................... 27
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry........... 27
Manual Sliding Side Door............................ 30
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped ...... 30
Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped.... 32
Child Locks................................................... 32
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED .. 34
Programming The Memory Feature............ 34
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory ........................................................ 34
Memory Position Recall............................... 35
SEATS ....................................................................35
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped ...................................................... 35
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 37
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 48
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 50
Heated Seats ............................................... 53
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped................... 54
Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 54
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks .......... 54
HEAD RESTRAINTS ..............................................55
Head Restraints — Front Seats................... 55
Head Restraints — Second Row
Quad Seats .................................................. 56
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench...... 56
Head Restraints — Third Row ..................... 57
STEERING WHEEL.................................................58
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 58
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ....... 58
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 2
3
MIRRORS ..............................................................59
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ....... 59
Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped .................................................. 60
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 60
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped .................................... 60
Conversation Mirror..................................... 60
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 61
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature................. 61
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ..................... 61
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped............... 61
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped..........62
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .. 62
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................63
Multifunction Lever...................................... 63
Headlight Switch.......................................... 63
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped ................................................... 63
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 64
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped .........64
Flash-To-Pass ..............................................64
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......... 64
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped.. 65
Headlight Delay — If Equipped .................... 65
Lights-On Reminder .................................... 65
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................. 65
Turn Signals ................................................. 65
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 66
Battery Protection ....................................... 66
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 66
Courtesy/Interior Lighting .......................... 66
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS .............. 68
Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 68
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped............ 69
Rear Wiper And Washer .............................. 70
CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 70
Manual Climate Controls Overview ............ 70
Automatic Climate Control Overview .......... 80
Climate Control Functions........................... 90
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ..................................................... 90
Operating Tips ............................................. 91
WINDOWS............................................................. 93
Power Windows............................................ 93
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........... 95
Opening Sunroof.......................................... 95
Closing Sunroof............................................ 96
Wind Buffeting ............................................. 96
Power Sunshade — If Equipped.................. 96
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 97
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 97
Ignition Off Operation .................................. 97
HOOD .................................................................... 97
Opening ........................................................ 97
Closing.......................................................... 98
LIFTGATE................................................................99
Opening ........................................................ 99
Closing.......................................................... 99
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ....................100
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ...........101
Cargo Area Features .................................103
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED....... 109
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®................................................109
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming...111
Using HomeLink®......................................112
Security ......................................................112
Troubleshooting Tips.................................112
General Information ..................................113
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..................................... 113
Storage.......................................................113
Sun Screens — If Equipped.......................117
Power Outlets ............................................ 118
Power Inverter — If Equipped ...................119
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped ......................120
Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped .......120
Overhead Sunglass Storage .....................120
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 121
Deploying The Crossbars ..........................121
Stowing The Crossbars..............................123
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER..................................... 125
Instrument Cluster Descriptions...............126
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ................... 127
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ......................................................128
Oil Life Reset..............................................129
Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode .......................129
KeySense Cluster Messages —
If Equipped .................................................130
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ..131
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................138
Instrument Cluster Display Programmable
Features Screen Setup..............................139
TRIP COMPUTER ............................................... 140
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ............... 141
Red Warning Lights....................................141
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................144
Yellow Indicator Lights...............................147
Green Indicator Lights...............................148
Blue Indicator Lights..................................149
White Indicator Lights................................149
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .... 150
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity..............................................150
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................ 151
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................152
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................152
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...153
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.........................159
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped.................................................159
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped............................164
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ..........................................167
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..................171
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....171
Important Safety Precautions...................172
Seat Belt Systems .....................................172
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...184
Child Restraints .........................................198
Transporting Pets ......................................215
SAFETY TIPS .......................................................216
Transporting Passengers ..........................216
Exhaust Gas ..............................................216
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................217
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................218
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .....................................219
Normal Starting..........................................219
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Or −30°C) .................................................223
After Starting — Warming Up The
Engine ........................................................223
If Engine Fails To Start .............................223
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button ..................................223
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ....... 224
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 224
PARK BRAKE...................................................... 225
Electric Park Brake (EPB) .........................225
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ........................... 228
Ignition Park Interlock ............................... 229
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System........................................................229
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ......230
Gear Ranges ..............................................230
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ........................ 234
POWER STEERING............................................. 234
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........... 235
Auto Stop/Start..........................................235
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .....................................................235
To Start The Engine While In Auto
Stop/Start ..................................................236
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System........................................................236
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System........................................................237
System Malfunction...................................237
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 4
5
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED.................... 237
To Activate..................................................238
To Set A Desired Speed.............................238
To Vary The Speed Setting ........................238
To Accelerate For Passing.........................239
To Resume Speed .....................................239
To Deactivate ............................................239
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 239
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Operation....................................................241
Activating Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)..............................................241
To Activate/Deactivate..............................242
To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................242
To Cancel....................................................243
To Turn Off..................................................243
To Resume .................................................243
To Vary The Speed Setting ........................243
Setting The Following Distance In ACC.....245
Overtake Aid...............................................246
ACC Operation At Stop...............................246
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu........247
Display Warnings And Maintenance.........247
Precautions While Driving With ACC.........249
General Information ..................................251
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode...........................................................252
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................254
ParkSense Sensors ...................................255
ParkSense Visual Alert ..............................255
ParkSense Display.....................................255
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........257
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System........................................................258
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............258
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....258
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .....................................259
ParkSense Sensors ...................................261
ParkSense Visual Alert ..............................261
ParkSense Display.....................................261
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........266
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................266
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............267
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....267
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED....................................268
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System .........................268
Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display......................................269
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display......................................274
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 280
LaneSense Operation................................280
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................280
LaneSense Warning Message.................. 281
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane
Detected.....................................................281
Changing LaneSense Status.....................282
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 283
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED .......................................................... 284
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................. 286
VEHICLE LOADING............................................. 288
Certification Label .....................................288
TRAILER TOWING ............................................. 289
Common Towing Definitions.....................289
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................291
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .........................................291
Vehicle Loading Chart ...............................292
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................294
Towing Requirements ..............................294
Towing Tips ...............................................297
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ......................................... 298
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle........................................................298
Recreational Towing — All Models............298
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 299
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................299
Driving Through Water .............................299
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 5
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ....................... 301
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED.... 301
General Information ..................................305
BULB REPLACEMENT ....................................... 306
Replacement Bulbs ...................................306
Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...........................308
FUSES.................................................................. 311
General Information ..................................311
Fuse Location.............................................312
Underhood Fuses.......................................312
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 320
Jack And Spare Tire Location....................320
Equipment Removal .................................320
Preparations For Jacking ..........................321
Jacking Instructions ..................................322
Road Tire Installation ................................325
Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped....327
Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire —
If Equipped .................................................328
Return Inflatable Spare Tire......................330
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ................... 330
JUMP STARTING................................................. 337
Preparations For Jump Start.....................337
Jump Starting Procedure...........................338
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ............................ 339
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.......................... 339
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................................340
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................341
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .......................342
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .................................................................344
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .......................344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................................345
Maintenance Plan .....................................345
ENGINE COMPARTMENT...................................349
3.6L Engine................................................349
Checking Oil Level .....................................350
Adding Washer Fluid .................................350
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................350
Pressure Washing......................................351
DEALER SERVICE ..............................................351
Engine Oil ..................................................351
Engine Oil Filter..........................................352
Engine Air Cleaner .....................................353
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............353
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................354
Body Lubrication........................................356
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................356
Exhaust System ........................................359
Cooling System ..........................................361
Brake System ............................................364
Automatic Transmission ...........................365
RAISING THE VEHICLE ...................................... 366
TIRES .................................................................. 366
Tire Safety Information..............................366
Tires — General Information ....................374
Tire Types ...................................................378
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................379
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................381
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .................382
Tire Rotation Recommendations..............382
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 383
Treadwear .................................................. 383
Traction Grades .........................................383
Temperature Grades .................................384
STORING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 384
BODYWORK........................................................ 385
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......385
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........385
Preserving The Bodywork..........................385
INTERIORS ......................................................... 386
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................386
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................387
Leather Parts .............................................387
Glass Surfaces ..........................................387
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 6
7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA ...................................... 388
Vehicle Identification Number ..................388
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................. 388
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 388
Torque Specifications................................388
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................................... 389
3.6L Engine ...............................................389
Reformulated Gasoline .............................390
Materials Added To Fuel ..........................390
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................390
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................391
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...391
MMT In Gasoline........................................391
Fuel System Cautions................................391
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................392
FLUID CAPACITIES............................................. 393
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................................ 394
Engine.........................................................394
Chassis .......................................................396
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 397
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 397
UCONNECT SETTINGS ....................................... 398
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings .................................398
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings .................415
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION...........436
Safety Guidelines.......................................436
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ..............437
Introduction................................................437
Radio Mode................................................438
Media Mode ...............................................447
Phone Mode...............................................454
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ..........................................................467
Radio Operation.........................................467
Media Mode ...............................................467
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL.................................468
UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED .............469
Uconnect Theater Overview ......................469
Getting Started ..........................................469
Accessing The System From The Uconnect
System........................................................469
Uconnect Theater Controls .......................470
Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Theater Rear Screens................................470
Pairing The Remote ...................................471
Unpairing The Remote...............................472
Media Sources...........................................472
Uconnect Theater Remote Control ...........473
Uconnect Theater Home Screen And
Controls ......................................................474
General Information ..................................475
Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Or USB Media File
From Uconnect System .............................475
Disc Menu ..................................................477
Blu-ray™ Controls – Disc Specific
Functions ...................................................477
Uconnect Theater Apps.............................477
Using The Rear Video USB Port ................479
Play Video Games......................................479
Headphones Operation.............................480
Display Settings .........................................481
Listening To Audio With The Screen
Closed......................................................... 482
Rear Climate Controls ............................... 482
Accessibility — If Equipped........................484
Wireless Streaming — If Equipped............484
BD And DVD Region Codes.......................485
Product Agreement....................................487
General Information ..................................489
FCC/IC Regulatory Notices........................490
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 491
Regulatory And Safety Information ..........491
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .................................................................... 493
Introducing Uconnect ................................493
Get Started.................................................493
Basic Voice Commands ............................494
Radio ..........................................................494
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 7
8
Media..........................................................494
Phone .........................................................495
Voice Text Reply.........................................495
Climate .......................................................496
Navigation (4C NAV) ..................................496
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped ..................496
Using Do Not Disturb ................................496
Android Auto™ — If Equipped ...................497
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped .................497
General Information ..................................498
Additional Information...............................498
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................499
Prepare For The Appointment...................499
Prepare A List.............................................499
Be Reasonable With Requests .................499
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................499
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................500
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........500
In Mexico Contact ......................................500
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............500
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................500
Service Contract .......................................500
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 501
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 501
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 501
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................501
In Canada...................................................501
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 502
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 8
9
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner's
Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the
services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.
Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations,
tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any
content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If
Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant
improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
1
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 9
10
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's
equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning
Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 10
11
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when using “Track-Use” parts and equipment:
NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment on public roads. FCA US LLC does not authorize the use of “Track-Use” equipment on public roads.
The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is for race vehicles on race tracks. To help ensure the safety of the race driver, engineers should supervise
the installation of “Track-Use” parts.
FCA US LLC does not authorize the installation or use of any part noted as “Track-Use” on any new vehicle prior to its first retail sale.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equipment before driving on public roads.
ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat belts when driving on public roads.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle
or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 11
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen
system (if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User
Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available
while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access
while the vehicle is in motion, the system will
display: Feature not available while the vehicle
is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you
will be able to explore your warranty information
and radio manual when and where you need
them. Your Uconnect system displays the
Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to
assist in better understanding your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to
connect and no external device needed for
playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the
year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-
ites category
Icon and symbol glossary
Warranty information
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
TIP:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it
to your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP
push button ignition system. The RKE system
uses a receiver module in the vehicle that
wirelessly links with the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate, activate the Panic Alarm,
optional power liftgate, left power sliding door,
and right power sliding door from distances up
to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a key fob.
When any button on the key fob is pushed, or
when any signal is being transferred between
the key fob and the vehicle, an LED light on the
key fob will flash as an indicator. The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE:
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob become depleted. The emergency key is
also for locking/unlocking the glove compart-
ment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indi-
cated by a message in the instrument cluster
display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If
the LED key fob light no longer illuminates
from key fob button pushes, then the key fob
battery requires replacement.
The key fob LED light brightness is designed
for indoor light viewing, so the LED light may
not be visible in direct sunlight.
In a situation where the battery is low or fully
depleted, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of
the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency
Key) against the START/STOP ignition button
and push to operate the ignition switch.
To Unlock The Doors
NOTE:
Uconnect Settings lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver's side doors on the first
push (default) or unlock all doors on the first push
of the unlock button on the key fob. To change
the default setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver front door and
sliding door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights
will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will be activated.
2nd Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob twice within five seconds to unlock all doors
and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to
1 — LED Light
2 — Lock
3 — Remote Start
4 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
5 — PANIC Alarm
6 — Emergency Key
7 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
8 — Liftgate
9 — Unlock
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will be activated.
This feature lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver's side doors or all doors
on the first push of the unlock button on the key
fob. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry;
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
this chapter for further information.
Emergency Key Feature
The key fob also contains an emergency key.
The emergency key is stored in the bottom of
the key fob.
Mechanical Latch To Release Emergency Key
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key become depleted. The emergency key is
also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, press the
mechanical button on the side of the key fob
with your thumb and pull the emergency key out
with your other hand while pushing the
mechanical button.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights
will flash once and the horn will chirp once to
acknowledge the signal. Settings in radio can
change to lights only, chirp only, or both.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
this chapter for further information.
Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated
Vehicle Key
If one or more doors are open or the liftgate is
open, the doors can be locked. This is signaled
by a quick flash of the turn signals.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors can be locked. The doors will
unlock again only if the key is inside the
passenger compartment.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Batteries contain harmful chemicals.
Dispose old batteries by placing them in
correct containers according to the law or by
taking them to a dealership, where they will
be handled appropriately.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
mechanical release button on the side of
the key fob with your thumb and then pull
the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw driver, or the
tip of your emergency key into the now
exposed slot and carefully pry on both sides
to disengage the snaps. Gently remove the
back cover from the fob, being careful not to
damage any of the snaps.
Separating The Key Fob Case
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery
rearward in its pocket until the battery lifts
up. Remove the depleted battery from the
battery pocket and dispose appropriately.
4. Fit a new CR2032 battery ensuring that the
positive (+) side is facing upwards. Push the
battery into the pocket until it is firmly
seated in place and secured under both
tabs.
5. Align the back cover into its original position
and snap it back in place by pushing it
against the fob until it is seated all around.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
KeySense Features — If Equipped
This feature provides the vehicle owner with the
ability to customize vehicle settings that can be
applied to determine the driving experience for
other drivers of the vehicle. The vehicle settings
are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the
vehicle owner creates when accessing the
specific settings for the first time.
KeySense also has additional features that are
always enabled when the specific key is in use
that cannot be set by the vehicle owner. While
this specific key fob is in use, the vehicle will
respond accordingly to the customized vehicle
settings and mandatory features. This includes
enhanced driving assistance features,
increased driver alerts, and the locking of
certain optional features.
KeySense Key Fob
KeySense Unique Splash Screen
At start-up the KeySense splash screen should
inform the driver that the vehicle will be
functioning in KeySense mode when the
KeySense key is in use.
Start-Up Display Features
Unique splash screen graphic
Telltale illuminated
After unique splash screen, and after stored
messages are cycled, then start-up
KeySense messages (Range & Max Speed)
are displayed
The following features are always enabled when
this key is in use:
Entertainment audio muted if 1st row occu-
pied seat belts are not fastened
Consistent seat belt unfastened chime
Maximum radio volume limited to 15 out of 39
Daytime Running Lights
Headlights On With Wipers
Rain Sensing Wipers
Automatic High Beams
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
This feature allows the driver to start the vehicle
with the push of a button, as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment, and the
drivers foot is on the brake pedal.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four
operating positions; three of which are labeled
and will illuminate when in position. The three
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The
fourth position is START; during START, RUN will
illuminate.
Engine START/STOP Button
The ignition can be placed in the following
positions:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices are available
ACC
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices are available
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
(Continued)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All the electrical devices are available
START
Start the vehicle
The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition
position or from a remote start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the keyless-go
system from starting the vehicle.
NOTE:
For further information, refer to "Starting The
Engine" in "Starting And Operating."
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always
remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Remote Starting System also activates the
Climate Control, vented seats (if equipped) in
temperatures above 80°F (26.7°C), and the
optional heated seats, and optional heated
steering wheel in temperatures below 40°F
(4.4°C).
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with
Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key
fob may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice
within five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start
button a third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key
is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be started with the key after
two consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Key fob PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in STOP/OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash
twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Then the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key
fob. However, the ignition must be placed in
the ON/RUN position before you can repeat
the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
Push and release the Remote Start button one
time or allow the remote start cycle to complete
the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the Climate
Control, vented seats (if equipped) are also
activated in temperatures above 80°F
(26.7°C), and the optional heated seats, and
optional heated steering wheel in temperatures
below 40°F (4.4°C). These features will stay on
through the duration of Remote Start, or until
the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Key Programming
Key fob programming is performed at an
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition
switch for unauthorized operation. When the
alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
locks, power sliding doors and power liftgate
are disabled. The vehicle security alarm
provides both audible and visible signals. If
something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible
and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
vehicle security light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Refer to "Starting The
Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for
further information.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry, make sure
the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry" in “Doors” in this chapter
for further information.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle
(if equipped). Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry" in “Doors” in this chapter for
further information.
Hands Free Liftgate Passive Entry activation
(if equipped).
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry, push the
keyless ignition START/STOP ignition
button (requires at least one valid key fob
in the vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the lift-
gate button will not disarm the vehicle secu-
rity alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will
turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds
between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the trigger
remains active and then the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself.
DOORS
Manual Lock
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on
each door trim panel forward. To unlock the
front doors, pull the inside door handle to the
first detent or rotate the door lock button until
the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear doors,
rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
Manual Front Door Lock Location
Manual Door Lock Knob
Manual Rear Door Lock Location
1 — Manual Door Lock
2 — Door Handle
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is
visible) when you shut the door, the door will
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
Central Lock/Unlock — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door
trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and
any front door is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking your keys in the vehicle. Placing the
ignition in the OFF position or closing the door
will allow the locks to operate. A chime will
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the “OFF”
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Power Unlock Switch
2 — Power Lock Switch
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
sound if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position and a door is open, as a reminder to
place the ignition in the OFF position and
remove the key fob.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature
unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door
is opened. This will occur only after the gear
selector has been placed into the PARK
position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
gear selector has been placed out of PARK and
all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature
will not operate if there is any manual operation
of the door locks (lock or unlock).
For further information, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia”.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key
fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and will arm the security
alarm (if equipped).
The sliding side doors can be unlocked from
the outside using the hands free or Passive
Entry system.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle passive entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the passive entry handle from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
If set by the customer in the Uconnect
Settings, unlocking with Passive Entry will
initiate illuminated approach (low beams,
license plate lamp, position lamps) for the
time 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry also initiates two flashes of the
turn lamps.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front door
handle to unlock the drivers side doors (driver/
sliding door) automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will rotate when the door is
unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors and liftgate will unlock when you grab
hold of the driver’s front door handle. To select
between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors
and the liftgate automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will rotate when the door is
unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Key Fob In
Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a key fob inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
Passive Entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry
vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid key fob
while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a key fob inside the car,
and it does not find any key fob outside the car,
then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and
no valid key fob is detected outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any
of the following conditions are met:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
There is a valid key fob outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
NOTE:
On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the
key fob can be locked in the vehicle.
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate and
pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
NOTE:
If “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is
programmed, only the liftgate will unlock when
the liftgate release handle is pulled. If “Unlock
All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors
and the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
release handle is pulled. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle lock button to
lock all four doors and the liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button, or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Manual Sliding Side Door
The sliding door may be opened from the inside
or the outside. Pull outward on the exterior
handle to open the sliding door. The sliding door
inside handle functions by rocking forward and
back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the
door and rocking forward releases the
hold-open latch in order to close the door.
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
To keep your door operating properly, observe
the following guidelines:
Always open the door smoothly.
Avoid high impacts against the door stop when
opening the door. This is very important when
your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door
will slide faster in the downhill direction.
There is a hold-open latch that is activated
when the sliding door is fully opened. This
latch will keep your sliding door open on any
incline. To close the sliding door after the
hold-open latch is activated, you must rock
the inside handle forward or pull outward on
the exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully
latched anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
The power sliding door may be power opened or
closed in several ways:
Key fob
Inside or outside handles
Buttons located:
In the overhead console
Just inside the sliding door
On the outside handle
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Push the button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open, close, or
reverse a power sliding door.
The key fob and the overhead console
button will operate the door when the door is
locked. All other ways require the sliding door to
be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with
Passive Entry, pressing the button on the
outside handle or Hands-Free feature (if
equipped) will unlock and open the sliding door,
with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle.
Overhead Console Power Switches
There are power sliding side door switches
located on the B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of
the power sliding door for the rear seat
passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the
handles or to avoid unintentional operation of
the power sliding doors from the rear seats,
push the power sliding door power off button,
located in the overhead console, to remove
power to the handles and buttons just inside
the sliding doors. The power off LED, in the
overhead console, will be lit when the handles
are manual. When the LED is lit, pushing the
power sliding door power off button will return
the handles to power operation.
NOTE:
If anything obstructs the power sliding side
door while it is closing or opening, the door
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position and an audible tone will sound,
provided it meets sufficient resistance. The
turn signals will flash with sliding door move-
ments.
If the power sliding door stops in the middle
due to obstacles, it will power open on the
next command.
Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
Passenger Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped
Hands-Free Sliding Doors
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a
straight in and out kicking motion under the
vehicle in the general location below the door
handle(s). Do not move your foot sideways or in
a sweeping motion or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the
sliding door will chime, the hazard lights will
flash and the sliding door will open almost
instantaneously. This assumes all options are
enabled in the radio settings.
NOTE:
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors
requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid
Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft
(1.5 m), the door will not respond to any
kicks.
The Hands-Free Sliding Door will only operate
when the transmission is in PARK.
With every movement of the Hands-Free
Sliding Doors, an audible tone will sound and
the turn signals will flash. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion on turning these alerts on or off.
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open position
and an audible tone will sound, provided it
meets sufficient resistance. The turn signals
will flash with sliding door movements.
If the power sliding doors encounters
multiple obstructions within the same cycle,
the system will automatically stop.
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be
turned off through Uconnect Settings. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information. The Hands-Free Sliding Doors
feature should be turned off during jacking, tire
changing, and vehicle service.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the sliding
doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door
Lock system.
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur
if caught in the path of the sliding door.
Make sure the door path is clear before
closing the door.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a sliding door or door open
message or warning indicator. Failure to do
this could result in unintentionally leaving
the sliding door open while driving.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the
Child Protection Door Lock control inward
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child
Protection Door Lock.
Child Protection Door Locks
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite
sliding door.
NOTE:
After engaging (or disengaging) the Child
Protection Door Lock, always test the inside
door handle with the sliding door closed to
make certain the Child Protection Door Lock
is in the desired position. The inside door
handle will not open the sliding door when
the Child Protection Door Lock is engaged.
The power sliding door will operate from the
switch located just inside the sliding door,
regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock
lever position.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power
sliding door from the rear seats, push the
Sliding Door Power Off button, located in the
overhead console. When the overhead
console power OFF LED is lit, the sliding door
may not be power opened or closed by
pushing the buttons just inside the sliding
doors or pulling on the handles.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control
outward (away from the vehicle) to
disengage the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite
sliding door.
NOTE:
After disengaging (or engaging) the Child
Protection Door Lock, always test the inside
door handle with the sliding door closed to
make certain the Child Protection Door Lock
is in the desired position. The inside door
handle will open the sliding door when the
Child Protection Door Lock is disengaged.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the sliding doors
cannot be opened from the inside door
handle when the Child Protection Door Locks
are engaged.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
saves desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver’s seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if
equipped)
Power steering wheel position (if equipped)
Side mirrors (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The driver memory setting switch is located on
the driver door, next to the door handle, and
consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Switch
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside
mirrors and radio station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory
switch, and then push the desired memory
button (1 or 2) within five seconds. The
instrument cluster display will show which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK.
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one
of two saved memory profiles by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must
select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key
Fob” feature through the Uconnect Settings.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
1 — Memory Profile Button 1
2 — Set Button
3 — Memory Profile Button 2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
(Continued)
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and then,
within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button
on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle speed must be less than or equal to
5 mph (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a
recall is attempted when the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button (1 or 2) on
the driver's door or the unlock button on the key
fob linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the
memory buttons on the driver's door during a
recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the
driver's seat stops moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be
selected.
NOTE:
Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
memory mirror recall.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle
is located under the seat cushion at the front
edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or
lowered by using a lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever
upward to raise the seat height or pump the
lever downward to lower the seat height.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
For models equipped with manual seats, the
recline lever is located on the outboard side of
the seat.
Manual Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and
push back to the desired position and release
the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to
return the seatback to its normal position. Using
body pressure, lean forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Handle
2 — Height Adjustment
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
Manual Recline — Quad Seats
Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
and push back to the desired position and
release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever
to return the seatback to its normal position.
Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
The second row bench seat can accommodate
two passengers, while providing easy access to
the third row seats without any folding of the
second row seats.
To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly,
lift the recline lever located on the outboard
side of the seat cushion, and push back to the
desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback
to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the
seatback has latched.
Recline Lever
The bench seat does not stow in the floor, but is
removable for added cargo space.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Removing The Bench Seat
1. Adjust the driver and passenger seats
forward to allow room for the bench seat
removal.
2. Raise the armrest completely, then lift the
recline lever located on the outboard side of
the seat to fold the seatback flat against the
seat cushion.
Folded Position
3. Pull the release strap located behind the
seat, in the center near the floor to release
the latches.
Release Strap Location
4. Once the latches are released, tilt the entire
seat toward the front of the vehicle. The
seat can now be removed through either
sliding side door, or through the liftgate.
Tilt Bench Seat Forward
NOTE:
Due to the weight of the bench seat, it is
recommended that two people are utilized
for its removal.
When storing the removed bench seat, it is
important to keep the seatback in the folded
position.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Reinstalling The Bench Seat
1. To reinstall the bench seat, align the seats
front attachments into the detent positions
on the floor.
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seatback into
its original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are
in the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the
seatback to the seating position.
Second Row Removable 8th Seat — If
Equipped
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it
is foldable and removable for added cargo
space.
Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
The release strap is located on the front of the
seat, near the floor. To remove the seat, pull the
release strap to release the rear latches. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the
vehicle by moving it in a rearward direction from
the detent positions in the floor.
Release Strap
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Seat can be removed easier with one outboard
seat stowed in the load floor.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the
detent positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward
to lock the seatback into its original position.
In Floor Detent Guides
Fold-Flat — Quad Seats
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full
upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
The seatback may lock into the fold-flat posi-
tion. Use the recline lever to unlock the seat-
back.
When returning the seat to the original posi-
tion, the headrest must be folded back to the
original position.
Fold Headrest To Upward Position
Easy Entry
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat
Installed
The second row seats can be tilted forward for
easy entry into the third row with or without a
child seat installed.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
1. Located in the seatback of the second row
seat is a handle that provides easier
access to the third row by tilting the seat
forward.
Easy Tilt Seat Handle
Seat Folded Forward With Child Seat Installed
2. To put the seat back into original position,
just pull back on the seatback and lock the
seat into position.
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more
accessibility for passengers to enter and exit
the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold
the seat by pulling the recliner handle on
the bottom part of the seat. Before pulling
the recliner lever, make sure the arm rests
are folded up.
Recliner Lever
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat.
Serious injury or death may occur.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the strap on the back of the seat and
the seat will tilt forward.
Pull Strap
3. To put it back into position, pull back on the
folded seat and make sure that it locks into
position. Then, pull the seatback toward the
back and fold down the arm rests.
Exit For Third Row Passengers
For passengers seated in the third row, there is
a pull strap located on the outboard side of the
seat near the bottom of the seatback. Third row
passengers can pull on the strap and push the
seat forward for folding the seatback down and
tilting the seat to the floor.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
NOTE:
This process is for when there is no child seat
installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat
is installed.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to
the seatback by pushing the button on the
guide and pushing the head restraint
down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the
anchors.
Release Strap “1”
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble
the seat rearward into the storage bin.
Strap “2”
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Stowed Third Row Seat
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat
out of the storage bin and push the seat
forward until the anchors latch.
Assist Straps
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to
return to its full upright position.
Strap “2”
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright
position.
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating,
the second and third row seats can be folded
into the floor for convenient storage.
Auto Advance ‘n Return — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with the Auto Advance ‘n
Return feature, the front seat will move forward
automatically to a location that will allow the
second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement, without
interference by the front seat. After the second
row seat is stowed, the front seat will move back
to the previous location once the Auto Advance
‘n Return button is pushed again.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature is available
to both the front driver and passenger power
seats (if equipped).
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
WARNING!
During power seat operation, personal injury
or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the front
seat is not occupied and the seat travel path
is clear when operating the power seat.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A one-touch Auto Advance ‘n Return button is
located on the B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of
the power sliding door.
Auto Advance ‘n Return Button
Using the Auto Advance ‘n Return Feature
NOTE:
The button is only functional when the power
sliding door is open and the vehicle is in PARK.
If the door is not open or the vehicle is not in
PARK when the button is pushed, the front
seat will not move and a message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
If the power sliding door is closing when the
button is pushed, the front seat will not move
and a message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature will not
function if the front doors are open.
1. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button.
2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat
movement. Refer to “Second Row Stow ‘n
Go” in this section for further information.
3. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button a second time. The front seat
cushion and seatback will return to the
original starting location.
NOTE:
To abort seat operation while seat is in
motion, push the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button, or push the front power seat button to
stop the seat movement. Pushing the Auto
Advance ‘n Return button again will return
the front seat to the original starting location.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return system includes
obstacle detection. When the system detects
an obstacle, the seat will stop, reverse direc-
tion, and return to the previous location. A
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster indicating that an obstacle has been
detected.
If the front seat is already in a location that
will allow space for Stow ‘n Go of the second
row seat, the front seat will not move and a
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat
will automatically re-calibrate when the Auto
Advance ‘n Return button is pushed. This
may result in the seat cushion moving
forward and downward, before moving to the
location that will allow space for the second
row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
Second Row Stow 'n Go
For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor,
move the front seat all the way forward using
the manual seat adjustment bar. Move the
seatback all the way forward using the recliner
handle located on the outboard side of the
cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid
position using the height adjuster handle in the
outboard side of the cushion.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button located on the B-Pillar trim (if
equipped.) Refer to "Auto Advance ‘n Return - If
Equipped" in this section for instructions.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
1. To access the storage area, remove the
floor mat (if equipped) and place the lock
rod in the locked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked posi-
tion.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
For information on storage bin function with
the seats rearward refer to “Second Row
Floor Storage Bins” in “Internal Equipment”
in this chapter for further information.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row
seat to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward
the front seats while folding the top half
down and rest it against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Remove the plastic storage bin from the
storage area, and store in a safe location.
5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat
by grabbing the strap on the lower part of
the seatback, and guide the seat into the
storage area.
Pull Strap
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat
into the storage area.
Push To Lock
7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel
backwards by the bottom corner edge of the
panel.
Extend Floor Panel
8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
Push To Lock
9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and
replace the floor mat (if equipped).
To Unstow Second Row Seats
For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the
floor, move the front seat all the way forward
using the manual seat adjustment bar.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button located on the B-Pillar trim (if
equipped). Refer to "Auto Advance ‘n Return - If
Equipped" in this section for instructions.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched:
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be latched and
flat to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal clear-
ance to the cover.
Do not sit on the second row seat when it is
in the stowed position with the seatback
upright otherwise damage to the seat may
occur.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
1. To access the storage area, remove the
floor mat (if equipped) and place the lock
rod in the locked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked posi-
tion.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row
seat to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward
the front seats while folding the top half
down and rest it against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull
the seat out of the storage area. Push the
seat rearward making sure that it locks into
the floor. Fold the seatback into the upright
position and pull the headrest up.
NOTE:
The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be
necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock
the back before folding into the upright position.
Pull Strap
5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the
storage area.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
6. To position the floor panel back into its
original state, grab the bottom corner and
extend it outward.
Extend Panel
7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until
it clicks into position.
Push Down To Lock
8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and
replace the floor mat (if equipped).
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power seats for the driver and front passenger.
The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switches control
the movement of the seat cushion and the
seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switches
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward, and the seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
in two directions. Pull upward or push
downward on the front of the seat switch, the
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may be equipped with power
lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on
the outboard side of the power seat. Push the
switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the
lumbar support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory
Settings Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when the ignition is cycled out of the
OFF position.
When the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move to a position
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop
if the driver seat position is between 0.9 –
2.7 inches (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously
set position when the ignition is cycled out of
the OFF position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an
associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled through the programmable
features in the instrument cluster display. For
further information, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel”.
Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If
Equipped
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind
the third row stow clip when using the seat
belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt
will not be positioned properly on the occu-
pant and they could be more seriously
injured in an accident as a result.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the trim
panel next to the seat, adjusts the seatback angle
forward/rearward for occupant comfort.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward. Push and hold the forward or
rearward button, the seat will move in the
direction of the button push. Release the button
when the desired position is reached.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat — If
Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located
in the right rear trim panel as part of a switch
bank.
NOTE:
The third row outboard seat belts may interfere
with the power folding of the seat. Place the
seat belt webbing behind the stow clip before
stowing or opening the seat. When the seat is in
the desired position, remove the webbing from
the stow clip so that it is ready for use. Never
leave the seat belt in the stow clip when it is
used to restrain an occupant.
NOTE:
The outer head restraints will lower automat-
ically as necessary when the power seat
begins to move.
The center head restraint raises and lowers
manually but will not lower automatically.
The head restraint can also be lowered
manually using the pull strap located at the
back of the seat. Refer to "Head Restraints -
Third Row" in "Head Restraints" in this
chapter for further information.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is
open and the vehicle is in PARK.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power
folding and unfolding positions for the third row
seats.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Left and right third row seats can be folded
individually or together. The third row power
folding seat adjusts to the following positions
using the switch bank located on the left rear
trim panel:
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
To move the selected seat(s) to the normal
(seated) position, push and release the
“Normal” button. The seat will automatically
stop when the Normal position is reached.
To move the selected seat(s) to the stow
position, push and release the “Stow” button.
The seat will automatically stop when the Stow
position is reached.
To move the selected seat(s) back in the
forward or reverse direction, push and hold the
“Fold Forward/Back” button. Release the
button when the desired position is reached.
NOTE:
1. Disconnect the center shoulder belt from
the mini-buckle before attempting to fold/
stow the power third row seats.
2. Before pushing the “Normal” or “Stow”
button, place the outboard seat belt
webbing behind the stow clips, located on
the rear trim panel. When the seat reaches
the desired position, remove the webbing
from the clip so it is ready for use to restrain
an occupant.
Seat Belt Stowage Clip
3. To abort seat operation while seat is in
motion, push a different seat position
selector switch to stop the seat. Once the
seat stops moving, then the desired
position can be selected.
4. The third row power seat system includes
obstacle detection. When the system
detects an obstacle, the motors will stop
and reverse direction. Should this occur,
remove the obstacle before pushing the
button again.
1 — Open To Normal
2 — Stow
3 — Fold Forward/Rearward
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Heated Seats
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings.
The indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated seats can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the second row seats are
equipped with heaters. There are two heated
seat switches that allow the second row
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches are located on the
sliding side door handle trim panels.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate
the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LO-level
heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the
heating elements off.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the initial
stages of operation. Then, the heat output will
drop to the normal HI-level. The level of heat
selected will stay on until the operator changes it.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the first row seat cushions are small
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two
speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the ventilated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with adjustable
armrests on the front seats. The armrest can be
adjusted by moving it up or down. To adjust the
armrest below the normal height, push and hold
the button and lower to the desired position.
Push the button a second time to lock the
armrest into place.
Adjustable Armrest
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery
bag handles are built into the seatbacks of the
first and third row rear seats. The floor supports
the partial weight of the bagged goods.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are
equipped with four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward.
The front head restraints are also adjustable
forward and rearward. To tilt forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle to the desired position. To adjust the
head restraint rearward, continue pulling
forward on the top of the head restraint to the
furthest forward position and the head restraint
will return to the upright position.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
Normal Position
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Forward Adjustment
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats
The second row outboard head restraints, as
well as the removable 8th passenger seat (if
equipped) have adjustable head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward.
NOTE:
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head
restraints are non-adjustable. Do not pull on
non-adjustable head restraints when folding.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
The second row bench seat is equipped with
adjustable head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward.
Bench Seat Head Restraint
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
NOTE:
For child restraint tethering, refer to “Occupant
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-
mation.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually
folded forward for improved rearward visibility.
Pull the release strap to fold them forward.
Release Straps
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in
the third row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be
raised and lowered for tether routing or height
adjustment. Refer to “Occupant Restraint
Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as
far as it can go. Then, push the release button
and the adjustment button at the base of each
post while pulling the head restraint up. To rein-
stall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
using the adjustment button, adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints — If
Equipped
For improved visibility, the third row outboard
head restraints can be folded using the
Uconnect System.
Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
Press the Head Restraint Fold button to
power fold the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
The head restraints can be folded downward
using the Head Restraint button or using the
manual release strap. The head restraints
must be raised manually when occupying the
third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in
the third row seats.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located left of the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the lever
upward until fully engaged.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes or more before
automatically shutting off. This time may vary
depending on the temperature of the
environment. The heated steering wheel can
shut off early or may not turn on when the
steering wheel is already warm.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the
driver to adjust up, down and left, right. Mirror
should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day
position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pushing the button at the
base of the mirror. A light to the left of the
button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the
right of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
— If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically
adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature is controlled by the inside automatic
dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Conversation Mirror
Located in the overhead console there is a
conversation mirror to view all the passengers
in the vehicle. Push the panel to release the
drop down mirror. Raise the mirror and push to
latch it back in the stowed position.
Conversation Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver-side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L
(left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you
want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the selected button will illuminate indi-
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Left and Right side power mirror preselected
positions can be controlled by the optional
Driver Memory Settings Feature. Refer to
“Driver Memory Settings — If Equipped” in
“Seats” in this chapter for further information.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent
positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped).
Refer to “Climate Controls” in this chapter for
further information.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s
view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The
driver's outside mirror will move slightly downward
from the present position when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE. The driver's outside mirror will then
return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored
memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
enabled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt
Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be enabled or
disabled through the radio touchscreen. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
1 — Mirror Select
2 — Mirror Control Switch
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R
(right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
fold in, pushing the switch a second time will
return the mirrors to the normal driving position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and
vehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), they will automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds
To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the
sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
down and swing the mirror cover upward. The
lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror
cover turns off the lights.
Illuminated Mirror
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column. The multifunction
lever controls the turn signals, headlight high/
low beams, and flash-to-pass functions.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. The switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, interior lights and the
fog lights.
Headlight Switch
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the first detent for parking
light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second
detent for headlight, parking light and
instrument panel operation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle
will illuminate when the engine is started. This
provides a constant lights on condition until the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. If the
parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running
Lights (DRLs) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is
activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the
vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn
signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Push Fog Light Control
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
High/Low Beam Switch
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the
multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
will switch from low beams to high beams.
Pulling back to the neutral position returns the
headlights to the low beam operation.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam system provides
increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use
of a digital camera mounted on the windshield.
This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of
view.
NOTE:
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON”
through the Uconnect system. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
AUTO position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you
to switch the headlights to the high beam
position. Refer to “Multifunction Lever” in
this section for further information.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at, or above 16 mph (25 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to
deactivate the Automatic High Beam system.
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF”
through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to
switch the headlights from the high beam to
the low beam position.
3. Rotate the headlight switch counter-
clockwise from the AUTO to the on position.
NOTE:
Once active, the Automatic High Beam system
will stop functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h).
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights
on or off based on ambient light levels. To turn
the system on, turn the headlight switch to the
extreme clockwise position aligning the
indicator with the AUTO on the headlight switch.
When the system is on, the Headlight Time
Delay feature is also on. This means your
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To turn the Automatic System off, turn the
headlight switch counterclockwise to the O (off)
position.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode
and the engine is running, the headlights will
automatically turn on when the wiper system is
also turned on. Headlights on when windshield
wipers are on may be found on vehicles
equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NOTE:
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting
your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition
in the OFF position while the headlights are still
on. The 90 second delay interval begins when
headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights
or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition is placed in the ON position, the delay
will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose
to have the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or
90 seconds or not remain on. To change the
timer setting, select the proper setting through
the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
If the headlights are turned off before the
ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within
45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF
position to activate this feature.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound when the driver's
door is opened.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push in the headlight switch control knob.
Pushing the headlight switch control knob in a
second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to
light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the indicator bulb is defective.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
has traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the
turn signals on, a chime will sound and a
message will display in the cluster to alert the
driver.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid
wearing down the battery if the headlights or
parking lights are left on for extended periods of
time when the ignition is in the OFF position.
After eight minutes of the ignition being in the
OFF position and the headlight switch in any
position other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will
turn off automatically until the next cycle of the
ignition or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if
the ignition is placed in any position other than
OFF during the eight minute delay.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the
courtesy lights on/off.
Courtesy Light Switches
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the
driver or passenger light switch.
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent
the battery from discharging once the doors
are closed.
If a light is left on, it will automatically be
turned off approximately 10 minutes after
the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are
courtesy/reading lights. The lights turn on when
a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is
opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
The courtesy lights also function as reading
lights. Push the lens to turn these lights on while
inside the vehicle. Push the lens a second time
to turn each light off.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the ambient light located in the
door handle lights, under instrument panel
lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin
lights.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the dimmer control on the right to the off
position (extreme bottom). The interior lights
will remain off when the doors or liftgate are
open.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of
the headlight switch, and is located on the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate
the instrument panel dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the instrument panel. At the top
detent of the instrument panel dimmer, all the
interior lights will also illuminate. At the bottom
most setting (extreme bottom) interior lights are
turned off (dome off), and the cluster, radio and
instrument lighting go to their lowest dimmable
setting.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
upward to the first detent. This feature
brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper Operation
The wipers and washers are operated by a
switch within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch
at the end of the lever upward, to the first detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the end of
the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation. To turn the windshield wipers off,
rotate the switch within the lever all the way
down to OFF.
Washer And Wiper Controls
NOTE:
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the windshield
wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot
return to the off position, damage to the wiper
motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a
variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate
the switch at the end of the wiper lever to the first
detent position, and then turn the switch at the
end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are four delay settings, which allow
you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum
of one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The
delay intervals will double in duration when the
vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward
toward you and hold while spray is desired. If
the lever is pulled while on the intermittent
setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the lever is released,
and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the lever is pulled while
the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will
operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers
necessary. Push the lever upward to the MIST
position and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers for the driver. This feature is especially
useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead.
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper lever to
one of the four intermittent wiper sensitivity
settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from
the windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity
position 3 has been calibrated for best overall
wiping sensitivity. If the operator desires more
wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity
position 4. If the operator desires less wiping
sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions
2 or 1. Place the windshield wiper lever in the
OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper switch is in the low or high position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice or dried saltwater is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off through the Uconnect System. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protective
features for the wiper blades and arms. It will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain
Sensing feature will not operate when the
ignition is first placed in the ON position,
when the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C),
unless the wiper control on the windshield
wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed
becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the
outside temperature rises above freezing.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is
ON, when the transmission gear selector is in
the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed
is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper
control on the windshield wiper lever is
moved, the vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved
out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit condi-
tions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rear Window Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring
upwards to operate one of two modes for the
rear window wiper:
First detent — intermittent mode.
Second detent — continuous mode.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the lever is
pushed while on the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously
selected. If the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Controls Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Manual Climate
Controls
Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Manual
Climate Controls
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C (air conditioning) can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. Performing this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the
front Defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns
off after 10 minutes.
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate
controls are on.
Driver and Passenger Temperature UP and DOWN Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. Pressing
SYNC on the touchscreen while in the Front Climate screen synchronizes the driver and passenger temperatures only. In order
to SYNC rear temperature to driver temperature, the touchscreen must be on the Rear Climate screen.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Faceplate Blower Knob
Touchscreen Blower
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Faceplate Modes
Control Knob
Modes Control
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen. The airflow distribution mode can
be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode
settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Icon Description
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Icon Description
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From
The Front MTC Display/Touchscreen
The Three-Zone Manual Temperature Control
(MTC) system allows for adjustment of the rear
climate controls from the front MTC display/
touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 Front MTC Panel Rear Control Display
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Front MTC Panel Rear Control
Display
To change the rear system settings:
Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-
screen to change control to rear control
mode; rear display appears. Control func-
tions now operate rear system.
To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect
system, press the "Front Climate" button on
the touchscreen.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Lock Button
Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings.
Front Climate Button
Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect system back to the Front Climate Controls.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen to
increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC
feature is active, the passenger’s temperature moves up and down with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC exits this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using
the buttons on the touchscreen.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the
outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a
shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes
from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Icon Description
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
system has floor air outlets at the rear right side
of the Third Row seats and overhead outlets at
each outboard rear seating position. The
system provides heated air through the floor
outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the
headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons
are located on the headliner on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
Icon Description
Rear Mode Control
Push this button on the Rear Climate Controls to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers to one of the
following:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving
the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control
Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control up button to raise the temperature. The
rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.
Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control down button to lower the temperature. The
rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.
Rear Blower Controls
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons. This
allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons
increases blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.
Icon Description
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C With 8.4–inch Display NAV Automatic
Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control System through an
intake grille, located in the floor under the
passengers’ seats. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could
overload causing damage to the blower
motor.
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air. Recirculation can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode if not
recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function
will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this
section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. Performing this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the
Front Defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns
off after 10 minutes.
Rear Climate
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate
controls are on.
Icon Description
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature UP And DOWN Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings. Changing the front or
rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Icon Description
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Modes Control
Modes Control
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Icon Description
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From
The Front ATC Panel—If Equipped
The Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) system allows for adjustment of the rear
climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-
screen to change control to rear control
mode, the rear display appears. Control func-
tions now operate rear system.
To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect
system, press the "Front Climate" or “Done”
button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Front ATC Panel Rear Control
Display
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Icon Description
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Icon Description
Rear Auto Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this
function causes the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within
this section for more information.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings.
Front Climate Button
Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect system back to the Front Climate Controls.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the front occupants with the ability to control the rear temperature. Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen
to increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature. When the
SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver
temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature/mode/blower settings while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using
the buttons on the touchscreen.
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the
outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of
the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes
from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
Icon Description
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
system has floor air outlets underneath the
passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at
each outboard rear seating position. The
system provides heated air through the floor
outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the
headliner outlets.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the
rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature
Lock button is turned off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner,
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature
and the rear modes to suit your comfort
needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
ATC System will automatically achieve and
maintain that comfort level. When the system is
set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary
to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Icon Description
Rear Mode Control
Push this button on the Rear Climate Hard Controls to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers to one of the
following:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving
the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control
Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control
up button to raise the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.
Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control
down button to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.
Icon Description
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons. This
allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons
increases blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function
will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.
Icon Description
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Climate Control Functions
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When in A/C mode with
the ATC set to a cool temperature, dehumidified
air flows through the air outlets. If Economy
mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off
the A/C mode in the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) display and deactivate the A/C
system.
NOTE:
If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall
remain active to prevent fogging of the
windows.
If not operating in AUTO mode, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of
fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost
Mode must be manually selected to clear the
windshield and side glass.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost Mode and adjust
blower speed if needed.
Recirculation For Automatic Temperature
Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you
may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing
the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this
button is selected. Press the button a second
time to turn off the Recirculation mode and
allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE:
In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recircula-
tion feature may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the wind-
shield. On systems with Manual Climate
Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost Mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
matically if this mode is selected. Attempting to
use Recirculation while in this mode will cause
the LED in the control button to blink and then
turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) display
will be turned off when the system is being used
in the manual mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
proper coolant selection. Use of the air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started
again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C (air
conditioning) for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to an authorized
dealer for filter replacement instructions.
Operating Tips Chart
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set
the mode control to
the position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to and turn on
to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
WINDOWS
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows
using controls located on the driver's door trim
panel.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows
by pushing the bar control just below the power
window controls.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
Front Passenger Power Door Controls
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch
has been placed in the OFF position, depending
upon the accessory delay setting. Opening a
front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front
passenger’s door trim panel which operates the
passenger door window and a set of controls
that lock and unlock all doors. The controls will
operate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or ACC position and during power
accessory delay.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
The front driver and front passenger controls
may be equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift
the window control fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto Up operation, push down on the
control briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
control to the first detent and release when you
want the window to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle and
use the window control again to close the
window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpect-
edly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull
the control lightly to the first detent and hold
to close window manually.
1 — Power Window Lockout Switch (If Equipped)
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Front Driver And Passenger Window Controls
1 — Window Open/Close
2 — Power Door Locks
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the
following steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window control up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the control up for an additional two
seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the
second detent to open the window
completely and continue to hold the control
down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close
the sliding door window by a single control on
the door handle assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
Sliding Door Power Window Control
NOTE:
The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear
windows are open and buffeting occurs, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize
the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the
left between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
The Power Shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
Opening Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the open switch and release it within one
second. The sunroof will open automatically
from any position and stop at the full open
position. This is called “Express Open.” During
Express Open operation, any other actuation of
the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
the open switch is pushed, the sunshade will
automatically cycle to the halfway open position
prior to the sunroof opening.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the open switch and the sunroof
will open to the full open position. Any release of
the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof
will remain in a partially opened condition until
the sunroof open switch is pushed again.
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the "Vent" button within one
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will
automatically cycle to the halfway open position
prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent posi-
tion.
Closing Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the close switch and release it within one
second and the sunroof will close automatically
from any position. The sunroof will close fully
and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close.” During Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the close
switch. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partially closed condition until the sunroof
switch is pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Power Sunshade — If Equipped
The sunshade has two programmed open
positions: half-open and full-open. When
opening the sunshade from the closed position,
the sunshade will always stop at the half-open
position regardless of express or manual open
operation. The switch must be actuated again
to continue to the full-open position.
Opening Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the sunshade open switch and release it
within one second and the sunshade will open
to the half-open position and stop
automatically. Push and release the sunshade
open switch again from the half-open position
and the sunshade will open to the full-open
position and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open.” During Express open
operation, any movement of the sunshade
switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
Push and hold the sunshade open switch and
the shade will open to the half-open position
and stop automatically. Push and hold the
sunshade open switch again and the shade will
open automatically to the full-open position. Any
release of the switch will stop the movement
and the sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed
again.
Closing Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the sunshade close switch and release it
within one second and the shade will close
automatically from any position. If the sunroof is
completely closed the shade will close fully and
stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the switch will stop the
shade.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
NOTE:
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close
button again will automatically close both the
sunroof and shade completely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the
sunshade close switch. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the shade
will remain in a partially closed condition until
the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
HOOD
Opening
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
The hood release lever (to open the primary
latch) and safety latch (to open the secondary
latch) must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward
the passenger side of the vehicle. The
safety latch is located behind the center
front edge of the hood.
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
4. Remove the support rod from the locking
tab and insert it into the seat located on the
underside of the hood.
NOTE:
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper
arms are not in motion and not in the lifted
position.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Vehicle must be at a stop and the transmis-
sion must be in PARK.
Closing
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the
other hand remove the support rod from its
seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and
drop it. Make sure that the hood is
completely closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Overhead console liftgate button
Key fob
Outside handle
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to release the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button
will release the liftgate when the liftgate is
locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate
to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with
Passive Entry, pulling the outside handle will
unlock and release the liftgate, with a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate.
Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry
NOTE:
If “1st Press of key fob Unlocks All Doors” is
programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will
unlock with a Passive Entry handle activation. If
“1st Press of key fob Unlocks Driver Door” is
programmed in Uconnect Settings, the liftgate
will only unlock with handle activation. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Closing
To Close The Liftgate
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when
the liftgate takes over the closing effort.
To Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside
handle will lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in
several ways:
Overhead console liftgate button
Key fob
Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
Button just inside the liftgate on the upper
left trim (when liftgate is open)
Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped) — opens lift-
gate only
Using the above ways:
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate
will open
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
close
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead
console to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
The key fob and the overhead console button
will operate the liftgate when the liftgate is
locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate
to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with
Passive Entry, depressing the touch pad on the
outside handle or Hands-Free Liftgate foot
activation (if equipped) will unlock and open the
liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate handle.
NOTE:
To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate
foot activation (if equipped) requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle.
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors” is
programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors
will unlock with a Passive Entry hands-free
activation. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door” is programmed in Uconnect
Settings, the liftgate will only unlock with
hands-free activation.
Tones are sounded and the turn signals are
flashed with liftgate movements. These
alerts can be turned on or off in Uconnect
Settings.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear
Interior Power Liftgate button (if equipped),
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate
opening.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch
Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside
handle will lock the vehicle.
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open the liftgate using hands-free activation,
use a straight in and out kicking motion under
the vehicle activation zone in the general
location below the liftgate door handle. Do not
move your foot sideways or in a sweeping
motion or the sensors may not detect the
motion.
Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package, the hands-free activation zone(s) for
the Power Liftgate will be located on the left and
right side of the receiver. Use a straight kicking
motion under either activation zone to open the
Hands-Free Liftgate.
Hands-Free Liftgate Trailer Tow Activation Zones
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the
liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash
and the liftgate will open after approximately
one second. This assumes all options are
enabled in the radio.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is
not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not
respond to any kicks.
NOTE:
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate
when the transmission is in PARK.
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate
while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will
automatically reverse to the closed position,
provided it meets sufficient resistance.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side
of the liftgate opening. Light pressure
anywhere along these strips will cause the
liftgate to return to the open position.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop. If this occurs,
the liftgate must be operated manually.
The power liftgate will release, but not power
open, in temperatures below −12°F
(−24°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of
snow or ice from the liftgate before opening
the liftgate.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended
period of time, the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate func-
tionality.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open
position. However, because the gas pressure
drops with temperature, it may be necessary to
assist the props when opening the liftgate in
cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature
and stop the power operation or reverse its
direction.
CAUTION!
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be
turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information. The Hands-Free Liftgate
feature should be turned off during Jacking,
Tire Changing, and Vehicle Service.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
(Continued)
(Continued)
Cargo Area Features
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed
position, there is a large area for cargo storage.
Rear Cargo Area
NOTE:
With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 ft
(1.2 x 2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit
on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed. The
front seats must be moved slightly forward of
the rearmost position.
Stow ‘n Vac Integrated Vacuum — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
integrated vacuum system. This vacuum is for
in-vehicle use only and should only be used on
dry materials and on in-vehicle surfaces. It is
located in the rear trim panel behind the sliding
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read all instructions before using. When using
your vacuum, basic precautions should be
followed, including the following:
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in either ACC mode or engine running (ON)
unless you are using the vacuum system.
Be aware a child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle when the vacuum system is in use.
ALWAYS push ignition button to place igni-
tion in the OFF mode when finished using
the vacuum system.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire, serious injury or
death:
Do not use vacuum while vehicle
is in motion or while driving.
Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids.
Do not use to vacuum up anything outside
of the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
1. Before Using Vacuum:
Accessory (ACC) Mode Operation - For up to
10 minutes of operation
Always apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and push ignition
button to place ignition in Accessory (ACC)
mode. The engine will not be running in this
mode. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children.
NOTE:
The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off
battery power and then the vacuum will shut
down. A low battery indication light (LOW PWR)
located below the vacuum nozzle storage loca-
tion will come on one minute before the vacuum
shuts down.
Engine Running (ON) Operation - For more
than 10 minutes of operation
Position vehicle outdoors and fully open
all side windows.
Always apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and leave
engine running.
Do not vacuum any flammable
liquids, such as gasoline, or use
around explosive vapors. Vapors
from flammable liquids may form an
explosive mixture with air and can be ignited
by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors may travel
to a source of ignition and explode.
Do not vacuum anything that is burning or
smoking, such as cigarettes, matches, or
hot ashes/embers.
Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close
attention is necessary when used by or
near children.
Do not leave the vacuum running while
unattended.
Use only as described in this manual. Use
only attachments provided with your
vehicle.
Do not put any object into openings. Do not
use with any opening blocked; keep free of
dust, lint, hair, and anything that may
reduce air flow.
Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlo-
rine bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such
as glass, nails, screws, coins, etc.
Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all
parts of body away from openings and
moving parts.
Only use with filter in place. Periodically
check that the filter is in place and in good
condition.
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as
switches, motors, or the like that tend to
produce arcs or sparks that can cause an
explosion. When using your vacuum near
gasoline-dispensing equipment or service
stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m)
away from the exterior enclosure of any
dispensing pump. The vacuum is mounted
more than 18 inches (45 cm) above ground
level in your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
2. Unclip the vacuum nozzle and pull to extend
vacuum hose from the storage location.
NOTE:
The hose can reach every corner of the vehicle
floor.
3. Install desired attachment if needed.
Front Storage Compartments
NOTE:
To access crevice or upholstery attachments,
open the front Attachment Compartment.
Crevice Tool — Able to reach into tight
spaces including the seat latches located
in the floor.
Upholstery Tool — Use to agitate dirt and
debris from carpets and seats. This tool
can also be used to pick up pet hair.
Hose Extension — Use to add another
12 ft (3.6 m) of usable length to the
vacuum hose. Hose extension is located
in the upper access panel behind the
third row seat on the driver’s side.
4. Push the vacuum on/off button located
under the vacuum nozzle storage location.
Use vacuum as needed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases can
cause serious injury or death. Follow the
precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases.
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Always position
vehicle outdoors and fully open all side
windows before using vacuum system with
the engine running.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly.
1 — Vacuum Nozzle Storage Location
2 — Attachment Compartment
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
When the vacuum is ON, the LED indi-
cator on the on/off button will illuminate.
When the vacuum is OFF, the LED indi-
cator will also be off.
After nine minutes of operation in ACC
mode (engine not running), the Low
Power Indicator Light (LOW PWR) will illu-
minate.
Power Buttons
1 — Low Power Indicator Light
2 — On/Off Button
WARNING!
For in vehicle use ONLY. To reduce the risk of
fire, serious injury or death:
Do not use vacuum while
vehicle is in motion or while
driving.
Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids.
Do not use to vacuum up anything outside
of the vehicle.
Do not vacuum any flammable
liquids, such as gasoline, or use
around explosive vapors. Vapors
from flammable liquids may form an
explosive mixture with air and can be ignited
by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors may travel
to a source of ignition and explode.
Do not vacuum anything that is burning or
smoking, such as cigarettes, matches, or
hot ashes/embers.
Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close
attention is necessary when used by or
near children.
Do not leave the vacuum running while
unattended.
Use only as described in this manual. Use
only attachments provided with your
vehicle.
Do not put any object into openings. Do not
use with any opening blocked; keep free of
dust, lint, hair, and anything that may
reduce air flow.
Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlo-
rine bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such
as glass, nails, screws, coins, etc.
Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all
parts of body away from openings and
moving parts.
Only use with filter in place. Periodically
check that the filter is in place and in good
condition.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
5. When finished, push power button to turn
vacuum off and store vacuum hose and any
attachments.
6. Before exiting the vehicle:
If the ignition is in the ACC position, push
the START/STOP ignition button to place
ignition in the OFF position, remove key
fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
If the engine is running, raise all of the
windows, push the START/STOP ignition
button to place ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, remove key fob from the vehicle,
close all of the doors and the liftgate and
lock the vehicle.
Vacuum Troubleshooting
DO NOT use with any opening blocked. If an
object becomes lodged in the hose, attempt
to fully extend the hose in a straight line while
the vacuum motor is running. If this does not
dislodge the object, turn the vacuum OFF and
remove the hose from the vehicle following
the removal instructions below. If the filter is
clogged, follow the emptying debris bin
procedure and lightly tap the filter on the
collection bin to remove any collected debris
from the filter. Both the bin and the filter can
be rinsed with water if needed. To avoid mold
and stale odors, allow both to dry completely
before reinstalling in your vehicle. If the filter
has tears, holes or other damage and needs
to be replaced, please contact an authorized
dealer.
If there are any other issues with your
vacuum, contact an authorized dealer. Your
vacuum has no user serviceable parts.
Debris Bin
The debris bin is located behind the lower
access panel behind the third row seat on the
driver’s side.
To Empty
1. Push power button to turn vacuum OFF.
2. Open the lower access panel by pulling the
finger grip towards you and then pull
downward.
Vacuum System Access Panels
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as
switches, motors, or the like that tend to
produce arcs or sparks that can cause an
explosion. When using your vacuum near
gasoline-dispensing equipment or service
stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m)
away from the exterior enclosure of any
dispensing pump. The vacuum is mounted
more than 18 inches (45 cm) above ground
level in your vehicle.
1 — Upper Access Panel
2 — Lower Access Panel
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist the release knob counterclockwise
and pull the bin towards you.
Debris Bin Release Knob
4. Remove the filter and dump the debris in a
trash can. Lightly tap the filter on the
collection bin to remove loose debris from
the filter. If the filter is clogged from
extended use, have the filter replaced by an
authorized dealer.
5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
NOTE:
The debris bin must be fully installed and locked
for the vacuum to function properly.
Hose Access Port
The hose access port is located behind the
upper access panel behind the third row seat on
the driver’s side.
To Remove Vacuum Hose For Cleaning
Vacuum System Access Panels
1. Unclip the hose from the hose access port
located in the rear of the vehicle by
pushing the yellow vacuum hose release
lever with right thumb and lifting the hose
with index finger.
2. Return to vacuum nozzle storage location
located behind the sliding door.
3. Grab the vacuum nozzle and gently pull the
hose out through vacuum nozzle storage
location.
4. Shake the hose to remove any objects stuck
in the hose. Take care not to perforate the
hose while attempting to dislodge any
objects.
5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall and clip
the hose into place.
1 — Upper Access Panel
2 — Lower Access Panel
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting
or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the driver’s
sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink®
indicator is located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Console
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the orange indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be
performed when programming HomeLink®
for the first time. Do not erase channels when
programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for infor-
mation or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
Garage door openers that were manufactured
after 1995 can be identified by the “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To program these kinds of garage door openers,
proceed as follows:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the
indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. On the garage door opener (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. On some garage door
openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device
is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the
next step after the LEARN button has been
pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training. To program
the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers
manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you press and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the
indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining Home-
Link® buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to flash
after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining Home-
Link® buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside
buttons for 20 seconds until the orange
indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be
erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most
common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door
opener hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a Rolling
Code.
Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Release Handle
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple
pockets for storage.
Front Door Storage
Instrument Panel Drawer
There is a storage drawer located in the lower
center of the instrument panel. It can be
released by pushing the access button above it.
The drawer is actuator assisted once the access
button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the
fully open position.
Drawer Access Button
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on
some models.
Front Seatback Storage
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the
bottle holder, they can spill when the door is
closed, burning the occupants. Be careful
when closing the doors to avoid injury.
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while
driving. If left open during a collision,
additional damage may occur to property or
the drawer mechanism.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently
molded into the front door entry scuff moldings.
Umbrella Holder
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
There are removable storage bins located in the
areas below the load floor, located in front of
the second row seats.
In Floor Storage Bin
1. To access the storage bins with front seats
in the rearward position, place the lock rod
in the unlocked position so the load floor
can fold upwards towards the seatback.
Lock Rod
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row
seat to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
latched to avoid damage from contact with
the front seat tracks, which have minimal
clearance to the cover. If the storage bin
cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when
your vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
second row seat storage bins. Once in the
storage bin, young children may not be able
to escape. If trapped in the storage bin, chil-
dren can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers
closed and latched while the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release
Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin
Cover has an Emergency Release Lever built
into the latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage
bin cover latching mechanism.
Coat Hooks — If Equipped
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for
the second and third row seating positions. The
coat hook load limit is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding
the recommended load limit can cause the coat
hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle.
Coat Hook
Sun Screens — If Equipped
Sun screens are available for second and third
row seating windows. The screens store in the
sill trim panels, and the tops of the windows are
equipped with hooks that the sun screens
attach to when pulled out.
Sun Screen Retracted
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is
near the top of the window.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
latched to avoid damage from contact with
the front seat tracks, which have minimal
clearance to the cover. If the storage bin
cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Once the screen is completely to the top of the
window, extend the top bar of the sun screen
over the two hooks attached to the top of the
window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab
upward to disengage the hooks, and feed the
screen back into the base sill.
Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB power
outlets, that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets can be labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a
“battery” are connected directly to the battery
and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or
turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located at the bottom
of the instrument panel.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlets, there is
also a power outlet located in the rear cargo
area.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
(Continued)
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter
outlet located on the right side of the vehicle,
before the third row of seats to convert DC
current to AC current. The Power Inverter can
power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring up to 150 Watts.
1 — F95A-F95B USB IP 10A
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Certain high-end video game consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
Power Inverter
The Power Inverter turns on when the device is
plugged in, and the ignition is in ON/RUN
position. It turns off when the device is
unplugged or the ignition is no longer in ON/
RUN position.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the Power Inverter
shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the Power Inverter, it
resets. To avoid overloading the circuit, check
the power ratings on electrical devices prior to
using the Power Inverter.
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
NOTE:
Cigar lighters can be purchased at an autho-
rized dealer through Mopar parts.
The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel. Push lighter inward to heat.
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically
returns to its initial position and is ready to be
used.
Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed
Smoker's Package Kit, a removable ash
receiver is inserted into one of the two
cupholders in the center floor console. To install
the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb
grip on the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure.
Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for
cleaning and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to
accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes
very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the
cigar lighter with care. Always check that the
cigar lighter has turned off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher
than 180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do
not damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
From the closed position, push the intention to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open
position.
Full Open Position
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to
carry weight on vehicles equipped with a
luggage rack.
The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed
over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered
stowed within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars
should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
Roof Rack
The Stow ‘N Place roof rack does not increase
the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle.
Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Deploying The Crossbars
1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen
the thumb screws at both ends of the
crossbar and lift the crossbar from its
stowed position in the side rail. Repeat
with crossbar on the opposite side.
Thumb Screw
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Removing Crossbars
2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end,
taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting
joint. Slide the thumb screw down.
Bending Pivot
3. Position the crossbars across the roof
making sure the letters on the crossbars
align with the matching letters on the side
rail.
Positioning Crossbars
4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both
thumb screws completely.
Installing Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to
complete the deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE:
The crossbars are not identical and have fixed
deployment positions. The rear crossbar can be
deployed in two different positions.
Stowing The Crossbars
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely
loosen the thumb screws at both ends. Lift
the crossbar away from the matching letter
to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the
pivot supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
3. Then, position the crossbar along the
correct side rail. Make sure the letters on
the crossbar align with the matching letters
on the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place,
tighten the thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second
crossbar on the opposite side.
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
To help control wind noise, stow the cross-
bars in the side rails when they are not in use.
If any metallic object is placed over the satel-
lite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio
reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or property
damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars deployed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
Load should always be secured to cross
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
Long loads that extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or
loads with large frontal area should be
secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 124
125
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” located in this chapter
for further information.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
4. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The gauge can indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather or up
mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF
position (and the key removed, for vehicles with
mechanical key), opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reaches “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the gauge drops
back into the normal range and is no longer
red. If the gauge remains on the “H”, turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Cooling System
Pressure Cap” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information.
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped
with an instrument cluster display (base or
premium cluster), which offers useful
information to the driver.
Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display controls allows
the driver to select information by pushing the
directional buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through the
Main Menu items.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
down arrow
button to scroll downward through
the Main Menu items.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Back / Left Arrow Button
Push and release the
left arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
OK Button
Push the
OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
The instrument cluster display (base/premium
cluster) features a driver-interactive display that
is located in the center of the instrument
cluster, and may include the following menu/
submenu items:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip (Trip A / Trip B)
Stop / Start — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Oil Life Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display for approxi-
mately five seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate it is time to change the
engine oil. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after
performing the scheduled maintenance,
refer to the following procedure.
NOTE:
This procedure should only be performed after
scheduled maintenance is completed. Reset-
ting oil life other than when associated with a
scheduled maintenance may result in damage
due to not properly maintaining the engine oil.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the vehicle.)
2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument
cluster display menu screen.
3. Push and release the
down arrow button to
access the ”Vehicle Info” menu screen.
4. Push the
left arrow button or right arrow
button to access the “Oil Life” submenu.
5. Hold the
OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to
100%.
6. Push the
up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display menu screen.
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Fuel And Oil Refresh Mode
Since it is possible to operate this vehicle for
extended periods of time without running the
gas engine, the fuel within the vehicle’s fuel
tank can become stale or the engine oil’s
lubricating properties can be reduced. To
prevent engine and/or fuel system damage due
to stale fuel, as well as, maintaining internal
engine lubrication, this vehicle is equipped with
a “Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode”.
The vehicle will automatically enter into the Fuel and
Oil Refresh Mode to minimize potential for stale
fuel, and to ensure lubrication of internal engine
components. When operating in this mode, the gas
engine will run to provide vehicle propulsion
(electric only operation is inhibited). A message will
be displayed in the instrument cluster whenever
Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode is active.
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 129
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The vehicle will automatically exit the Fuel and Oil
Refresh Mode when conditions have been
satisfied. If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil
Refresh Mode, due to fuel which has been in the
fuel tank for a long period of time (becoming stale
fuel), the engine will run whenever the vehicle is
operational (no electric only operation) until the
low fuel level warning is activated. It is also
possible to exit the Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode
sooner by adding a minimum of 4 gallons of new
fuel to the vehicle’s fuel tank.
NOTE:
If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode
to maintain engine lubrication, adding fuel will
not exit the mode sooner.
If the vehicle enters Fuel and Oil Refresh Mode
to maintain engine lubrication properties, the
engine may run for a period of up to 20 minutes
when fully warm whenever the vehicle is
operational (no electric only operation). If the
vehicle is shut down before conditions to exit
the refresh mode have been satisfied, the
engine may run for additional time on
subsequent trips.
NOTE:
Frequent short trips at low ambient tempera-
ture conditions are more likely to trigger the
lubrication based mode.
KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
Continuous, dedicated telltale
Unique Display Splash Screen
With KeySense in use there will be multiple
associated messages shown in the following
table:
Setting Instrument Cluster Display Message
None – With vehicle ignition ON “KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h”
Max Vehicle Speed
“Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime
“Approaching max speed xx MPH/km/h” supported by a chime
Start Up Fuel Alert message “Range to empty xxx miles or km”
Early Low Fuel Alert Message “Fuel Low”
ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Forward Collision Warning “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 130
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the main menu items for several features.
Use the
up and down arrow buttons to scroll
through the driver interactive display menu
options until the desired menu is reached.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in this
chapter for further information.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Speedometer is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to toggle between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the left or right
arrow button to scroll through the following
information submenus:
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is
OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON
is displayed with tire pressure values in each
corner of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON,
and the tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire
displayed in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and
cannot be reset. Refer to “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” under “Safety” for
further information.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temp
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine
operation.
Oil Life
Displays the remaining engine oil life as a
percentage.
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 131
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK
button. The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will
be displayed at all times, but the following
conditions will need to be met in order to reset
Oil Life:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
If the conditions are met, holding the
OK button
will reset the gauge and the numeric display will
return to 100%.
If the conditions are not met, a popup message
will display for five seconds, describing the
required conditions, and then the Oil Life screen
will reappear.
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist display icon is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. The Fuel
Economy Menu will display the following:
Two submenu pages that can be toggled
between using the
left and right arrow
buttons; one with Current Value displayed
and one without the Current Value displayed:
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km,
or km/L)
Range To Empty (miles or km)
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km,
or km/L)
The Max and Min values will correspond
to the particular engine requirements
Hold
OK to reset average fuel economy infor-
mation.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the left or right
arrow button to scroll through the Trip A and Trip
B submenus. The Trip information will display
the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu displays in the instrument
cluster display.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Messages is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This feature shows the number
of stored warning messages. Pushing the
right
arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
NOTE:
The popup messages indicate the status of the
system and/or the conditions that need to be
met. Messages remain in the stored stack until
condition is cleared.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the
OK button to enter the submenus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
1 — Lower Left
None
Compass (Default)
Outside Temp.
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 133
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2 —Upper Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp.
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio
Digital Speed
Menu Title (Default)
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 134
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
3 — Lower Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp. (Default)
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
4 — Odometer (Premium Instrument Cluster)
Show — Default
Hide (Odometer will still appear when door is open)
5 — Defaults
Restore
Cancel
6 — Speed Warning
On
Off
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 135
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
1 — Upper Left
None
Compass (Default)
Outside Temp.
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
2 — Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp (Default)
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 136
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
3 — Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp.
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Menu Title
Menu Title (Default)
Digital Speed
4 — Defaults
Restore
Cancel
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 137
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Speed Warning is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter speed warning. Use the up or
down arrow button to turn the speed warning ON
or OFF, then push and release the
OK button to
confirm the selection. If the ON status is selected,
use the up or down arrow button to set the
desired speed, then push the
OK button to set
the speed for the speed warning. A speed
warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument
cluster, with a number matching the set speed,
with a pop up message to inform the driver that
the speed warning has been set to the desired
speed. Each time the set speed is exceeded, a
single chime will sound and a pop up warning
message will display. If the set speed is exceeded
more than 2 mph (3 km/h), a continuous chime
will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the speed
is no longer exceeded. The telltale in the
instrument cluster will also change from white to
yellow, and a pop up warning message will pop up
on the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense
is in use.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the 12 Volt vehicle battery conditions
are deteriorating, electrical load reduction
actions will take place to extend the driving time
and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
reducing power to or turning off non-essential
12 Volt electrical loads. Load reduction will be
functional when the vehicle propulsion system
is active.
The vehicle may not be running depending on
the HV battery SOC or temperature. It will
display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may
stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When 12 Volt load reduction is activated, the
message “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in this chapter for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 138
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12
Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
Instrument Cluster Display Programmable
Features Screen Setup
Push the up or down arrow button to scroll
through the Menu Items until the Screen Setup
displays in the instrument cluster display. Push
the
OK button to enter Screen Setup. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument
cluster display as well as the location that
information is displayed.
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 139
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Configurable Screen Setup Menu Titles
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
up or
down arrow button until “Trip Info” is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Navigate between Trip A or Trip B by using the
right and left arrows.
For each trip the following information will be
displayed:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Shows the Average MPG for Trip A since the
last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A
since the last reset. Elapsed time will incre-
ment when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Shows the Average MPG for Trip B since the
last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B
since the last reset. Elapsed time will incre-
ment when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Push and hold the
OK button to reset the
currently displayed trip.
• Compass • Trip A Distance
• Outside Temp • Trip B Distance
• Time • Audio Info
• Range to Empty • Menu Title
• Average MPG
• Speedometer
(Digital Speed) select
between MPH/km
• Current MPG
• Defaults (Restore/
Cancel)
• Odometer
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 140
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 141
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
a door is ajar/open and not fully
closed. This indicator will reflect
which doors are open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 142
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Condition (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is left open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 143
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast
rate for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until
the vehicle is disarmed.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off Soon
This warning will be displayed when
the vehicle has determined an
operational issue that will cause the
vehicle's propulsion system to turn off
will occur shortly. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as possible. Have the vehicle transported
to an authorized dealer for service
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 144
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be
on, even if it was turned off previously.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control system
is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The
warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker. Refer to
“LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.85 gal (7 L) this
warning light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 145
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation” in “Safety” for further information.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service. Refer to “Stop/Start System”
in “Starting and Operating” for further
instructions.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 146
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 147
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Vehicle Detected Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Adaptive Cruise Control
speed is SET and the target vehicle is
detected.
Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for
further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Adaptive Cruise Control
speed is SET and there is no target
vehicle detected.
Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for
further information.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The KeySense indicator is illuminated
when a KeySense key is detected
upon startup of the vehicle. The
indicator will remain lit for the entire
key cycle as a reminder that the KeySense key
is in use. While the KeySense key is in use, the
vehicle will respond to settings associated with
the KeySense profile. Refer to “Keys” in
“Getting to Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode. Refer to “Stop/
Start System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further instructions.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 148
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the vehicle equipped with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has
been turned on but not set.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is ready, but
not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Set Speed Display
The Set Speed Display indicator light
indicates the set speed for the Speed
Control and Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) settings.
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 149
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 150
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may
not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you should not proceed to the
I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition in
the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 151
152
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS
activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
NOTE:
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is turned to the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready
Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS),
Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake
application and then applies optimum pressure
to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must
apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) is a feature of
the ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS)
modules that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions in which the
ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The
torque that the steering wheel receives is only
meant to help the driver realize optimal steering
behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle
stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active, is the torque applied
to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through
small torques on the steering wheel, which
means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles
by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle.
This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the
potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s
steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM
can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving
the roadway, striking objects or other vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle
under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
(Continued)
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode
may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC OFF” button and the “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF”
button and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be
desirable to allow more wheel spin. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pushing the “ESC
OFF” button to enter partial mode “Partial Off”
mode. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by
momentarily pushing the “ESC OFF” button.
This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is turned to the ON mode. It should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes
on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition
is turned ON.
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC
system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
indicates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
Hill Start Assist (HSA) is designed to mitigate roll
back from a complete stop while on an incline.
If the driver releases the brake while stopped on
an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does
not apply the throttle before this time expires,
the system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The park brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N). For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will
periodically apply a small amount of brake
pressure to remove any water buildup on the
front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When
RBS is active, there is no notification to the
driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emergency
braking situations. It anticipates when an
emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The Electronic Brake Control (EBC)
system will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce vehicle power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature
of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if
TCS and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
are in a reduced mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC
cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If so,
there may not be enough brake pressure to
hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill
when the brake pedal is released. In order to
avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information. When TSC is
functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may
be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop
the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar-based sensors, located inside the
rear bumper fascia, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R) and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.7 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rear view mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear
for both your vehicle and trailer before making
a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
side of your vehicle, this may result in false
detections. The BSM warning light may even
remain illuminated the entire time the vehicle
is in a forward gear.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple
of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
If the system detects degraded performance
due to contamination or foreign objects, a
message will warn you of a blocked sensor and
the warning indicators in side view mirrors will
be on. The warning indicators will remain
illuminated until blockage clearing conditions
are met. First clear the fascia area around the
sensors of the blockage. After removing the
blockage, cycle the ignition from on to off and
then back on again to reset the system.
If the blockage message is still present after
cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes
Of Operation” in this section for further
information.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car
washes etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver. Additionally, if the host vehicle is
obscured by a flat object on one side the system
can falsely alert on vehicles approaching from
the opposite direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful
when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current oper-
ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started the previously
stored mode will be recalled and used.
The BSM system can work in conjunction with
the Keysense function of the vehicle (if
equipped). Refer to “KeySense Cluster
Messages" in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to miti-
gate the potential forward collision. If the
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in
the Uconnect settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
Changing the FCW status to “off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will
be available in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is
turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle
is restarted.
FCW can work in conjunction with the
KeySense function of the vehicle (if
equipped). Refer to “KeySense Cluster
Messages" in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warning when the latter is at a farther
distance than the “Medium” setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front when the
distance between the vehicle in the front is much
closer. This setting provides less reaction time
than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous
braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event
of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pres-
sure values in a different color, or the Uconnect
radio will display a TPMS message, when this
occurs you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing and Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn ON the “TPMS Warning Light.”
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
(Continued)
to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-
sures and warning have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde-
sirable system operation or sensor damage
may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/
or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for
use on aftermarket wheels and may
contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance or sensor damage. Customers are
encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure
proper TPM feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster
and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display an "Inflate to XX" message and a
graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument
cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value as shown in the
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values
in the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will return to their original color, and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place
of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will
remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument
cluster will still display a different color
pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display
a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in
the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (--), as
long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display pressure values in place of the
dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further
information) must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”
section for customer service contact
information.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
WARNING! (Continued)
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from
your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up
or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third
Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third
row center seat belts feature a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the
seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when
the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate can then be stored out of the
way in the headliner for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind
the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate from its stowed position in the
headliner slightly behind the second or
third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
left head restraint.
Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
(Continued)
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular
latch plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into
its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under
the “Child Restraints” section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
(Continued)
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped
with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for
easier access to occupants. If the park stitch
interferes with the tight installation of a child
restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching
to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install
the car seat normally. When the car seat is
removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate
above the park stitch to enable occupants to
latch the seatbelt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Third Row Stow Clip - If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip
on the lower trim behind the third row. This clip
is used to hold the seat belt out of the path of
the power folding third row seat. Only place the
seat belt webbing in this clip while folding and
opening the seat. Do not leave the webbing
behind the clip when using the belt to restrain
an occupant.
Third Row Stow Clip
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind
the third row stow clip when using the seat
belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will
not be positioned properly on the occupant
and they could be more seriously injured in
an accident as a result.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemen-
tal Passenger Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(OCS) that is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight, as determined by
the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment based on occupant classification.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
(Continued)
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adult, allowing a full-power Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never
allow children to ride in the front passenger seat
and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child
restraint
Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a
child in a
forward-facing child
restraint or booster
seat*
Reduced-power
deployment OR
Full-power
deployment
Properly seated adult
Full-power
deployment OR
reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat
Reduced-power
deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat,
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
(Continued)
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
may not comply with required Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
mounted in the instrument panel below the
glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bags provide enhanced protection during a
frontal impact by working together with the seat
belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irrita-
tion continues, see your doctor. If these parti-
cles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
(Continued)
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it
is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle-
safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
(Continued)
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a
rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of
this vehicle is not designed to manage the
crash forces of this type of car seat. In a
crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer,
and your child may be more severely injured
as a result.
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make
sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s
squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat
belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
7 Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating LATCH Positions 8 Passenger LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
the child seat installed in front of it.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the
center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle
can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow
'n Go head restraints are not removable. The
3rd row center head restraint is removable in all
vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable. Refer to “Head
Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown) 7
Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown) 8
Passenger Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorages
Shown) 7 Passenger Bench Seating
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
There are tether strap anchorages
located behind all second row seating
positions. The third row has a tether
anchor on the 40% seat for the right
outboard position and in the center of the 60%
seat for either the center or left outboard
seating position. All tether anchorages are
located on the back of the seat, near the floor.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row 7 Passenger
Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row 8 Passenger An-
chorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage
Shown)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in
the third row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are
used for the right outboard position behind the
front passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are
used for the center seating position (2). The left
outboard position (3) does not have lower
anchorages. Do not
install a child restraint
using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH
position in your vehicle.
Center Seat LATCH Positions
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
WARNING!
Use anchorages C and D to install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint in the
center seating position (2). Do not install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to "To Install A LATCH-Compat-
ible Child Restraint" for typical installation
instructions.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint
Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
the child seat installed in front of it.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the
center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle
can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow
'n Go head restraints are not removable. The
3rd row center head restraint is removable in all
vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable. Refer to “Head
Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
Frequently Asked Questions
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward
in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped
with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for
easier access to occupants. If the park stitch
interferes with the tight installation of a child
restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching
to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install
the car seat following the steps above. When
the car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide
the latch plate above the park stitch to enable
occupants to latch the seatbelt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off
features of the child restraint, do not use the
lock-off feature. Instead, switch the seat belt to
the locking mode, as described in the steps
above or move the car seat to a different
seating position.
Seat Belt Park Stitch
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement”
for additional information.
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row 8 Passenger
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row 7
Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved
for that seating position, located behind the top
of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the
60% seat in the third row may be used by either
the left outboard or the center seating position.
Only tether one child restraint to the tether
anchorage at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether
anchorage for either seating position on the
60% third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the
anchor and the child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the
center head restraint and route the tether
strap around the inboard (left) side of the
head restraint support posts, as shown in
the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than
one child restraint to the tether anchorage on
the 60% seat in the third row. This anchorage
is intended for one child restraint at a time.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
(Continued)
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
4
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 218
219
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the
brake before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after 10
seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
button again.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
positions; OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the
ignition positions without starting the vehicle
and to use the accessories follow these steps:
Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC position
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”),
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
position (instrument cluster will display “ON/
RUN”),
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle
could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at
the same time. If pressure is detected on both
pedals simultaneously, a warning message will
display in the instrument cluster. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
back up system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the
Instrument Cluster Display and on the shifter.
As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver
attempts to turn off the engine, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s
transmission to the PARK position. The rotary
shifter will automatically reset itself to the PARK
position. The vehicle’s ignition will then move to
the OFF position (Engine off). When AutoPark is
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and near the gear selector. If the "P" indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK.
As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
(Continued)
activated the instrument cluster will display the
message “AutoPark Engaged”
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP
BUTTON
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s
transmission to the PARK position. The Electric
Park Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also activate
in some conditions. Please reference SAFE
HOLD pages for additional information
regarding this function.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Brake pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “
AutoPark Engaged” will display
in the instrument cluster.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or Brake Pedal
is not depressed
The MESSAGE “
AutoPark Engaged” will display
in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
To release the parking brake manually, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
Press on the brake pedal, then push the park
brake switch momentarily.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
(Continued)
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may Park.
PARK will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “
Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will display in the Instrument Cluster
Display if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). The gear position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
If Engine Fails To Start
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF
position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition switch position will remain in the
ACC position until the gear selector is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the
OFF position. If the gear selector is not in
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) when the driver shifts into PARK,
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) and the above condition are met,
enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left in the
NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button
is pushed once, the instrument cluster will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and
the engine will remain running. Never leave
a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmis-
sion is in PARK, the system will automatically
time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the
ignition will switch to the OFF position.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
the engine block heater is recommended. For
ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C),
the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood, behind to the passenger’s side
headlamp. Follow the steps below to properly
use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord
(behind the passenger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures
the heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the
cord to the hook-and-loop strap and
properly stow away behind the passenger’s
side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater cords are available from an
authorized Mopar dealer.
The engine block heater will require 110
Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater
element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in
at least one hour to have an adequate
warming effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades,
refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park
Brake System (EPB) that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that
make the park brake more convenient and
useful.
The park brake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
leaving the vehicle, make sure that the park
brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
You can engage the park brake in two ways;
Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
Brake feature in the customer programmable
features section of the Uconnect Settings.
The park brake switch is located in the
integrated center stack.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the park brake manually, push the
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight
whirring sound from the back of the vehicle
while the park brake engages. Once the park
brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp
in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the
brake pedal while you apply the park brake, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement. The park brake can be applied even
when the ignition switch is OFF, however, it can
only be released when the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON/RUN position.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 180 seconds. The
light will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage
whenever the transmission is placed into PARK.
Once the park brake is engaged, the BRAKE
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. If
your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement while
the parking brake is engaging.
The park brake will release automatically when
the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position,
the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, and
the driver seat belt is buckled and an attempt is
made to drive the vehicle away by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
Press on the brake pedal, then push the park
brake switch momentarily. You may hear a
slight whirring sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You
may also notice a small amount of movement in
the brake pedal. Once the park brake is fully
disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the
switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the park brake before placing the
gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The park brake should always be applied when-
ever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 226
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the park brake while the
vehicle is in motion, push on the electric park
brake switch for as long as engagement is
desired. The BRAKE warning lamp will
illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound.
The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in
motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is
in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is
brought to a complete stop using the park
brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake will remain
engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the
Electric Park Brake system, a yellow EPB fault
lamp will illuminate. This may be accompanied
by the BRAKE warning lamp flashing. In this
case, urgent service of the electric park brake
system is required. Do not rely on the park
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to
be applied automatically whenever the vehicle
is at a standstill and the automatic transmission
is placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled
and disabled by customer selection through the
“Customer Programmable Features” section of
the “Uconnect Settings”.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake System that will engage the park brake
automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured. If
the automatic transmission is not in PARK, the
seat belt is unbuckled, the driver door is open,
the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no
attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal, the park brake will
automatically engage to prevent the vehicle
from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the Electric Park Brake Switch while the
driver door is open and brake pedal is pressed.
Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be
enabled again once the vehicle reaches
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to
the OFF position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by
an authorized dealer. You should only make
repairs for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. You should only enter
Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
brake to slow the vehicle may cause
serious damage to the brake system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 227
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Electric Park Brake system, this can only be
done after retracting the Electric Park Brake
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can
be done easily by entering the “Brake Service”
through the “Uconnect Settings” in your vehicle.
This menu based system will guide you through
the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator
in order to perform rear brake service.
Brake Service Mode has requirements that
must be met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The park brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake
fault lamp will flash continuously while the
ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 228
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
(Continued)
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is
OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear selector has
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW
shift positions. Using the LOW position manually
downshifts the transmission to a lower gear
based on vehicle speed. The transmission gear
range (PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
Push down on the gear selector and then rotate
it, to access the L position. You must also press
the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when stopped or moving at
low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges
at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate
the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been
developed to meet the needs of current and
future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and
calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s
driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
9th gear only in very specific driving situations
and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 230
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
(Continued)
(Continued)
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 231
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
park brake and shift the transmission into PARK
if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds
normal operating limits, the transmission
controller may modify the transmission shift
schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand
the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent
transmission damage due to overheating.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 232
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light” will
illuminate, a warning message will appear in the
instrument cluster, and the transmission may
operate differently until the transmission cools
down.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch, and shifts into 8th
or 9th gear, are inhibited until the transmission
fluid is warm refer to the “Note” under “Torque
Converter Clutch” in this section. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the
transmission will downshift for increased
engine braking. To access the LOW position,
push down on the gear selector and rotate it
fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear,
or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven
to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic
transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the
torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal
operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the
clutch automatically disengages.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 233
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine and/or transmission is warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving).
Because the engine speed is higher when the
torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting prop-
erly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The
torque converter clutch will function normally
once the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation System. This system is designed
to address exhaust and engine noise. The
system relies on four microphones embedded
in the headliner, which monitor exhaust and
engine noise, and assists an onboard
frequency generator, which creates
counteracting sound waves in the audio
system’s speakers. This helps keep the vehicle
quiet at idle and during drive.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from
providing assist, you will still have the ability to
steer the vehicle manually.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, they indicate that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred which caused
an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING"
OR "POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -
SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
steering wheel icon are displayed on
the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance. Refer to “Warning Lights
And Messages” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
The power steering system is fully electric; it
requires no power steering fluid.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 234
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal, pressing the accelerator pedal or
shifting out of DRIVE (D) will automatically
re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts to handle the additional
engine starts.
Auto Stop/Start
The Stop/Start feature is enabled
after every normal customer engine
start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.
To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster within the
Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The shifter must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
throughout the Auto Stop/Start process.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions for Stop/
Start and ensure they are fulfilled. Detailed
information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument
cluster display Stop/Start screen. In the
following situations the engine will not stop:
If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the
Stop/Start OFF button.
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low. During this time a
message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready
Battery Charging".
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 235
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop
Include:
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temp too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous AUTOSTOP.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a Stop/Start READY state under more
extreme conditions of the items listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Auto Stop/Start
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is depressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Auto Stop/Start:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low. During this
time a message will display "Stop/Start Not
Ready Battery Charging".
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
Stop/Start OFF Button
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on
the instrument panel). The light on the
switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
Stop/Start system) the engine will not be
stopped.
4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to an ON condition every time the ignition is
turned off and back on.
Automatic Shutdown
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic
shutdown feature. If the vehicle is left in READY
mode (vehicle running) with the gear selector in
PARK for one hour after the driver exits, this
feature will automatically turn the vehicle off.
Notifications have been added into this feature
to raise awareness of the timed event:
In the interior of the vehicle, the instrument
cluster will display “Ready To Drive”, and will
be accompanied by three audible chimes
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 236
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
while exiting. These interior warnings will
occur regardless of whether the key fob
remains in the vehicle or is removed.
For the exterior of the vehicle, the horn will
sound three times if the fob is removed from
the vehicle and the vehicle is in the “READY”
mode.
Please consider this feature when intentionally
running the vehicle for extended periods of time
over one hour. To restart the vehicle, follow the
normal vehicle starting process.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is left in the ACC or RUN (engine
not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out
(shut down) after an initial 30 minutes of inac-
tivity, followed by the additional amount of time
for power accessory delay selected in the radio
settings menu. Once the vehicle times out, it will
switch to the OFF position.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
After turning off the Stop/Start system, push
the Stop/Start OFF switch again (located on the
instrument panel). The light on the switch will
turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display and the Stop/Start telltale will remain
yellow. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 237
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control System can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second
time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET
(+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 238
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions.
Speed
Control function performs differently. Please
refer to the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your cruise
control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 239
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining
an appropriate distance between vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for
cruising at a constant preset speed. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes
function differently. Always confirm which mode
is selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for approximately 3 minutes
in the stop position. If the target vehicle
does not start moving within 3 minutes
the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 240
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC
system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will effect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward
Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the instrument cluster
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When you apply the brakes.
When the parking brake is applied.
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
When the vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range.
When the brakes are overheated.
When the driver door is open at low speed.
When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low
speed.
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 241
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster display will show
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the
system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the
current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal,
after the ACC has been set. If you do not, the
vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the
set speed. If this occurs:
The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
The system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 242
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Driver door is opened at low speeds.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer
than two seconds, then the driver will either
have to push the RES (resume) button, or
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the
ACC to the existing set speed.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET
(+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 243
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be
decreased by pushing the SET
(-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed decrement shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the powertrain braking power does
not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the
set speed, the brake system will automati-
cally slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following a target vehicle. If an
ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 244
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Decrease button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 245
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages. (Refer to the infor-
mation on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, your
vehicle will resume motion, without any driver
interaction, if the target vehicle starts moving
within two seconds.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC. The vehicle will
accelerate to the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately three consecutive
minutes, the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at
a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the parking brake will
be activated, and the ACC system will be
cancelled.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 246
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster displays the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display
is located in the center of the instrument
cluster. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located
on the steering wheel) and the following will
display in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will show
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional
information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 247
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and also
a chime will indicate when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded
due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield, driving directly into the sun and fog
on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
and the system will have degraded
performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in adverse weather
conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 248
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original Set
Speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 249
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not
yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for
the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 250
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 251
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed
without requiring the driver to operate the
accelerator. Cruise Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes,
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the
system is turned on via the on/off control. It
turns green when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET
(+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 252
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET
(-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed decrement shown is
dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing
the memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 253
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
a parking maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped
with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle
brakes may be automatically applied and
released when performing a reverse parking
maneuver if the system detects a possible
collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can override the automatic
braking function by pressing the gas pedal,
turning ParkSense off via ParkSense switch,
or changing the gear while the automatic
brakes are being applied.
Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC
is not available.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the Park-
Sense Park Assist system or the Braking
System Module.
The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle
speed, road conditions, and brake capability.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for moving obstacles that
approach the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer-Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect
System.
ParkSense will retain its last known configura-
tion state for the automatic braking function
through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle.
The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled
at this gear selector position, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear
within the instrument cluster display indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 254
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
Rear Sensor Locations
ParkSense Visual Alert
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer - Programmable Features section
of the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an
obstacle has been detected, the warning
display will turn on indicating the system status,
and remain on until the vehicle is moved out of
REVERSE.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 255
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 256
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the ParkSense switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 257
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When the KeySense feature is in use, the Park-
Sense System will reject customer input to turn
the system off via the switch. The instrument
cluster display will show the "KeySense in Use
Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled"
message.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
show the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds
while the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate and
“PARKSENSE OFF” message will be displayed.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF”.
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster display will show
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 258
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
(Continued)
(Continued)
ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-
gate is in the open position.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). If your
vehicle is equipped with an Automatic
Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be
automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 259
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The driver can override the automatic
braking function by pressing the gas pedal,
turning ParkSense off via ParkSense switch,
or changing the gear while the automatic
brakes are being applied.
Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC
is not available.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the Park-
Sense Park Assist system or the Braking
System Module.
The automatic braking function may not
provide enough vehicle deceleration to avoid
colliding with a detected obstacle depending
on vehicle speed, road conditions, and brake
capability.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for moving obstacles
that approach the rear of the vehicle from the
left and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of
the Uconnect System.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state for the automatic braking func-
tion through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle.
The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and
above the system's operating speed, a warning
will appear in the instrument cluster display
indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 260
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
ParkSense Sensors
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
Rear Sensor Locations
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Visual Alert
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning
display will turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 261
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone For Rear Only/Solid Arc
Fast Tone For Rear Only/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 262
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 263
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense
Warning screen will be displayed when an
obstacle is detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front
region, the display will show a single arc in the
center front region. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle. A fast sound
tone will be produced when reaching the
second flashing arc and will change to a
continuous sound tone when the first flashing
arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
front region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right front region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
Slow Tone For Rear Only/Solid Arc
Fast Tone For Rear Only/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 264
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Customer-Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect System, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime
volume settings will not be accessible from the
instrument cluster display.
The chime volume settings include LOW,
MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume
setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches (100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 265
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the ParkSense switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
NOTE:
When KeySense feature is present, the Park-
Sense System will reject customer input to turn
the system off via the hard switch. The instru-
ment cluster display will show "KeySense in Use
Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled" message.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
show a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
be displayed with a "WIPE OFF" or “SERVICE”
overlay, depending on the location and fault type.
The system will continue to provide arc alerts for
the side that is functioning properly. These arc
alerts will interrupt the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is
detected within the five second pop-up duration.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 266
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and
other vibrations could affect the performance
of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition key.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster will display “PARK-
SENSE OFF” for five seconds while the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the appro-
priate fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind or
in front of the appropriate fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-
gate is in the open position.
There may be a delay in the object detection
rate if the object is moving. This may cause the
automatic braking application to be delayed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 267
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel and
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying
a proper parking space, providing audible/
visual instructions, and controlling the steering
wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's
parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is capable of
maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e.,
driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, responsible for any
surrounding objects, and must intervene as
required.
The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy
rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking
space that has surfaces that will absorb the
ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have
at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated
before the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is fully calibrated and performs accu-
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic
vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-
mance of the feature. The system will also
continuously perform the dynamic vehicle
calibration to account for differences such as
over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch again (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
The parking maneuver is completed.
Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 268
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space.
Touching the steering wheel during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park
Assist switch.
The driver’s door is opened.
The liftgate is opened.
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between
DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot
be completed within eight shifts, the system
will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present:
The gear position is in DRIVE.
The ignition is in the RUN position.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is
activated.
The driver’s door is closed.
The liftgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to slow down. If the
vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph
(30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver
must then reactivate the system by pushing the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
The outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and
then the LED will turn off if any of the above
conditions are not present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching -
Push OK for Perpendicular Park” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display. You
may switch to perpendicular parking if you
desire. Push the OK button on the left side
steering wheel switch to change your parking
space setting.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 269
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When seeking a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
Active ParkSense Searching
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a parallel parking sequence.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 270
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
Once the vehicle is in position, the system will
instruct the driver to stop the vehicle’s
movement and remove hands from the steering
wheel.
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with the
driver’s hands removed from the steering
wheel, the system will then instruct the driver to
place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 271
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between
DRIVE or REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot
be completed within eight shifts, the system
will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take full control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
backward movement, the system will instruct
the driver to check their surroundings and stop
the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 272
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
When the driver places the gear selector into
the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
forward movement, the system will instruct the
driver to check their surroundings and stop the
vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 273
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
The vehicle is now in the parallel park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will
be instructed to check the vehicle's parking
position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle
position, they should shift to PARK. The "Active
ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position"
message will be momentarily displayed.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching -
Push OK for Perpendicular Park” message will
show in the instrument cluster display. Push the
OK button on the left side steering wheel switch
to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back
to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular
parking maneuver, the “Active ParkSense
Searching - Push OK for Parallel Park” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display.
Active ParkSense Searching Display
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 274
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When seeking for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a perpendicular parking sequence.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 275
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your
hands removed from the steering wheel, you
will be instructed to place the gear selector into
the REVERSE position.
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 276
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of eight shifts between
DRIVE or REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot
be completed within eight shifts, the system
will cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
backward movement, the system will instruct
the driver to check their surroundings and stop
the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 277
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into
the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
forward movement, the system will instruct the
driver to check their surroundings and stop the
vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 278
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park
position. When the maneuver is complete, the
driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's
parking position. If the driver is satisfied with
the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position" message will be momentarily
displayed.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and
in front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recog-
nize every obstacle, including small obsta-
cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 279
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle
position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The
LaneSense system will also provide a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display
to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across that
lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible and visual warning to the driver when
the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the
driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
Lane Sense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/
RUN position.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 280
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense Telltale is solid white only when the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs on the left side.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the visual warning in the
instrument cluster display will show the left
inside lane line flashing yellow (on/off), while
the outside lane line on the left of the display
will remain solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Inside Line, Solid
Yellow Outside Line/Flashing) With Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines
Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white. The LaneSense
telltale is solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the
system is “armed” to provide visual warnings
in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left inside and outside lane
lines turn solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid green to solid yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel
in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 281
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Inside Line, Solid Yellow
Outside Line) With Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left inside lane line flashes
yellow (on/off) while the left outside line
remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Inside Line, Solid
Yellow Outside Line) With Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late)
that you can configure through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn-
ings.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 282
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with
a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear. The ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
ParkView Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10
seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
A touchscreen button to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the
camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can
be disabled via a touchscreen button
personalization entry in the camera settings
menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 283
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
Surround View Camera System that allows you
to see an on-screen image of the surroundings
and top view of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE or a different view
is selected through the "on screen soft buttons".
The top view of the vehicle will show which
doors are open. The image will be displayed on
the touchscreen display along with a caution
note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. The Surround View Camera
System is comprised of four sequential
cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate
and side mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera System has program-
mable settings that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the
rear camera view and top view is the default view
of the system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned on), the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. There is a touchscreen button “X”
to disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned off), the Surround View
Camera mode is exited and the last known
screen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle,
including the side view mirrors and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 284
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Modes Of Operation
“Manual” activation of the Surround View
camera is selected by pressing the Surround
View Camera soft key located in the “Controls”
screen within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top view will show in the Uconnect System
with Rear View and Front View in a split view
display. There is integrated ParkSense arcs in
the image at the front and rear of the vehicle.
The arcs will change color from yellow to red
corresponding the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
ParkSense Arcs
NOTE:
Front tires will be in image when the tires are
turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the
image will appear distorted.
Top view will show which sliding doors are
open.
Open front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View
This is the Default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top view of the vehicle with optional
active guide lines for the projected
path when enabled.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 285
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view of
the rear camera system. The Top view
will be disabled when this is selected
Front View
The Front view will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and
is always paired with the Top view of
the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
front camera system. The Top view will be
disabled when this is selected.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated in the following
conditions:
The speed of the vehicle reaches greater
than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The vehicle shifted into PARK from a different
gear.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than
REVERSE, press the “X” button.
The camera delay system is turned off manu-
ally through the Uconnect settings menu.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has
occurred, see an authorized dealer.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround View Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety
of your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The
Surround View camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using Surround View
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using Surround View.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 286
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the
ignition off.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler
door (3 o'clock position) and release to
open.
Fuel Filler Door
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
the nozzle opens and holds both flapper
doors while refueling.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from
the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the
center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the
fuel filler door and then release. The fuel
filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel filler door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel filler door around the
perimeter to break the ice build up.
Take care to open both flappers with the
funnel to avoid spills.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 287
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your
VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 288
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The Gross vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the
total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that
you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in this
chapter for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of
the trailer plus the weight of all cargo,
consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
"loaded and ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the
maximum capacity of the front and rear axles.
Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/
Vehicle Certification Label” in this chapter for
further information.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 289
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control can be a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between
the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that
typically provides adjustable friction associated
with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while
traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and
automatically applies individual wheel brakes
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 290
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission
Trailer Tow
Package
GCWR (Gross
Combined Weight
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Weight)
Max. Tongue Weight
3.6L/Automatic
Yes 8,600 lbs (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lbs (1,632 kg) 360 lbs (163 kg)
No 6,500 lbs (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1,500 lbs (680 kg) 149 lbs (67 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 291
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight
referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Main-
tenance” for further information.
Vehicle Loading Chart
Follow these steps to determine the total weight
the vehicle can carry.
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your
vehicle.
Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of
vehicle full fluids NO Occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
For calculation purposes, average weight
of an occupant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
GVWR = 6005 lbs (2723 kg)
CURB = 4500 lbs (2041 kg)
Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6005 lbs
(2723 kg) - 4500 lbs (2041 kg) = 1505 lbs
(682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lbs [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
1505 lbs (682 kg) – 600 lbs (272 kg) (4 x
150 lbs [68 kg]) – 360 lbs (163 kg) (10% of
3600 lbs [1632 kg]) = 545 lbs (247 kg) of
cargo in vehicle
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 292
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants
Max Cargo No
Trailer
Tongue Load, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With
Max Trailer 360 lb
(136 kg) Tongue
Load
2 People / 300 lbs (136) kg 1205 lbs (546 kg)
1205 lbs (546 kg) –
360 lbs (136 kg) =
845 lbs (383 kg)
845 lbs (383 kg)
4 people / 600 lbs (272 kg) 955 lbs (433 kg)
955 lbs (433 kg) –
360 lbs (136 kg) =
545 lbs (247 kg)
545 lbs (247 kg)
7 people / 1050 lbs (476 kg) 455 lbs (206 kg)
455 lbs (206 kg) –
360 lbs (163 kg) =
95 lbs (43 kg)
95 lbs (43 kg)
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 293
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of
front or rear axles.
GAWR is found on sticker in Driver’s Side
Door Jamb.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
“Scheduled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled
Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper maintenance intervals. When towing
a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR
ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 294
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for proper tire inflation proce-
dures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 295
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453
kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and
they should be of adequate capacity. Failure
to do this could lead to accelerated brake
lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and
longer stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 296
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. For
increased engine braking on steep downhill
grades, select the LOW range.
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not
increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 297
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
NOTE:
To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement, you must ensure that the Auto
Park Brake feature is disabled before towing
this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the ground).
The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or
disabled via the customer programmable
features in the Uconnect Settings.
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
If your vehicle is disabled and in need of
commercial towing service, please refer to
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Recreational Towing — All Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground All Models
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 298
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off
the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off
the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the park brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but
do not start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the park brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is
possible for a wedge of water to build up
between the tire and road surface. This is
hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following
precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the
roads are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
a collision in a sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 299
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 300
301
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
in the lower center area of the instrument
panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning Flashers. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second
time to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 301
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you will be connected to a representative for
assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle is being driven and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional assistance is
needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional assistance is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the oper-
ator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 302
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
(Continued)
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact your dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 303
304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
Delayed accessories mode is active
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 304
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 305
306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Center & Rear Reading Lamps LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Front Door Courtesy Lamp LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Instrument Cluster Lamps LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Lamp(s) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp
Low Beam - D3S
High Beam - 9005LL
Halogen Headlamp
Reflector Low Beam - H11LL
Projector Halogen Low Beam - 9005HL+
All High Beams - 9005LL
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 306
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 307
Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp (If Equipped) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp
PWY24WNA (If Halogen Headlamp Equipped)
PWY24WSV (If HID Headlamp Equipped)
Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp
PWY24WNA (If Bulb Equipped)
LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp H11LL
LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21/5WLL
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp
Rear Tail - Body Side - W21/5WLL (If Bulb Equipped); LED (Serviced At An
Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail - Liftgate - W5WLL (If Bulb Equipped); LED (Serviced At An
Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker: W3W
Backup Lamp W21W
License Lamp LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 307
308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps —
If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage
discharge light source. High voltage can remain
in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off.
Because of this, you should not attempt to
service a HID headlamp light source yourself. If
an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10
seconds, as the system charges.
Halogen Headlamps
1. Reach behind the headlamp housing to
access the headlamp bulb cap.
2. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and
rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket
assembly and rotate counterclockwise to
remove from the housing.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical
connector and then connect the
replacement bulb.
Headlamp Bulb
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp
switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced
properly. See an authorized dealer for service.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 308
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly
into the headlamp housing and rotate
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to
lock it in place.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket
assembly counterclockwise, and then
remove the front turn signal lamp assembly
from the lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the
replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket
assembly into the housing, and rotate the
front turn signal lamp socket clockwise to
lock it in place.
Front And Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner
wheel liner and carefully peel back liner for
access.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 309
310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp
socket and rotate a quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker
lamp socket and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in
lamp assembly and rotate a quarter turn
clockwise to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and
install the three fasteners.
Front Fog Lamp — Halogen
1. Remove fasteners from inner wheel liner
and carefully peel back liner for access.
2. Reach through the front fascia to the fog
lamp housing to access the bulb.
3. Rotate the front fog lamp bulb counter-
clockwise, and remove the bulb from the
front fog lamp housing.
Front Fog Lamp Socket
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical
connector and then connect the
replacement bulb.
5. Install the front fog lamp bulb into the front
fog lamp housing, and rotate the bulb
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Position the inner wheel liner in place and
install fasteners.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-Up Lamps And
Tail Lamps (If Bulb Equipped)
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to
pry off the bulb access cover on the lower
liftgate trim.
3. Back-up lamps/tail lamp (if bulb equipped)
are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter-
clockwise.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 310
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311
(Continued)
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s).
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate
trim.
Rear Bodyside Mounted Taillamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove two torx head screws on the
bodyside lamp using a T30 screwdriver.
3. Remove lamp from vehicle body and locate
bulb socket on rear of lamp. Rotate socket
counterclockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s).
6. Reverse process to reinstall the lamp onto
vehicle.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED
assembly. See an authorized dealer for
replacement.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LED. See an
authorized dealer for replacement.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 311
312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into a controller located
in the engine compartment.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery.
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses,
micro-fuses, circuit breakers and relays. A label
that identifies each component is printed on the
inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make
sure engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks
located at each side of the PDC cover, avoid the
usage of screw drivers or any other tool to
remove the cover, since they may apply
excessive force and result in a broken/
damaged part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its
two locks.
Power Distribution Center
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
ment.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
ement (blown fuse).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 312
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Used
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier/Active Noise Control
F10 – – Not Used
F11
–
– Not Used
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (ESS Only)
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #3 (Power Locks)
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #1)
F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT
F22 – – Not Used
F23 – – Not used
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 313
314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F25A – 10 Amp Red
Handsfree LT & RT RR Door
Release Mod
F25B – 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter/ PWR Mirror
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module-RT
F28A – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Report
F28B – 10 Amp Red USB + AUX Port / Video USB Port
F29 – – Not Used
F30A – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB 1&2
F30B – 15 Amp Blue PWR Lumbar SW
F31 – – Not Used
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Control Module
F36 – – Not Used
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #2)
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
F41 – – Not Used
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 314
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315
F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed #1 (Interior Lights)
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Used
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module-LT
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Used
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
F55A – 15 Amp Blue
Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless
Ignition System (KIN) / (Electronic
Steering Lock-BUX ONLY)
F55B – 15 Amp Blue DVD / Video Routing Module (VRM
F56A – 10 Amp Red
Front and Rear HVAC Control
Module / Occupant Classification
Module (OCM)/Electronic Steering
Lock (ESL)
F56B – 10 Amp Red ESP/ESC
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 315
316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F57 – – Not Used
F58 –
10 Amp Red
Drive Train Control Mod / Power
Transfer Unit — If Equipped
F59
30 Amp Pink
–
Trailer Tow Receptacle — If Equipped
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow
Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn —
If Equipped
F62 – – Not Used
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow
Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn —
If Equipped
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp
F65 – – Not Used
F66 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/
SGW
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Haptic Lane Feedback Module
(HALF) / Parktronics System (PTS)/
Drivers Assist System Module
(DASM)
F68 – – Not Used
F69 – – Not Used
F70 – – Not Used
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 316
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR ISC
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect/DCSD/Telematics
F77A – 10 Amp Red
RR Entertainment Screen 1 & 2/
Media HUB 1 & 2/3rd Row USB
Charge Only/2nd Row USB Charge
Only/Vaccum Cleaner SW/3rd Row
Recline ST SW/LT & RT Stow N Go
SW/LT & RT Sliding Door SW
Backlight
F77B – 10 Amp Red Rain Sensor/Sunroof /CRVMM
F78A – 15 Amp Blue
Transmission Control Module
(TCM)/ E-Shifter
F78B – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F79 – 10 Amp Red
ICS/Front And Rear HVAC/ SCCM/
EPB
F80 – – Not Used
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 317
318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F83
20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights — If Equipped
30 Amp Pink –
Headlamp Washer Pump —
If Equipped
F84 30 Amp Pink –
Drive Train Control MOD — If Equipped
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Used
F87 – – Not Used
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – 15 Amp Blue
Front Ventilated Seats/Heated
Steering Wheel
F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F93 – – Not Used
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump
F95A – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port — ACC RUN
F95B – 10 Amp Red
Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP
(Direct) B+
F96 – 10 Amp Red
Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) (Airbag)
F97 – 10 Amp Red
Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) (Airbag)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 318
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319
* 30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp
F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Module - If Equipped
F100A – 10 Amp Red AHLM
F100B – 10 Amp Red
Rear Camera/LBSS/RBSS/CVPM/
Humidity Sensor/In Vehicle
Temperature Sensor
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp * Power Seats (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp
FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes
+ RR PWR Window Lockout
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 319
320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED
Jack And Spare Tire Location
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air
compressor (if equipped) or tire service kit (if
equipped) are stowed behind an access panel
on the left hand side of the vehicle.
Jacking Equipment Location
Equipment Removal
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking
equipment.
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire
Service Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing
nut that is holding the Inflatable Spare Tire
and gently remove it from the storage area.
Remove wrench from foam tray.
NOTE:
Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the
options for spare tire equipment may vary.
Jacking Equipment
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 320
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321
Jacking Equipment
Jacking Equipment
3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise to collapse from storage
area that is located behind the tire.
Jack Location
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 321
322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Jacking Instructions
Jack Warning Label
NOTE:
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for information about the inflatable spare tire,
its use, and operation.
Extending The Wrench
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle
when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 322
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323
2. There are two jack engagement locations
on each side of the vehicle body. These
locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle
body.
Jack Locations
Front Lifting Point
Front Jack Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack
and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
get any part of your body under a vehicle that
is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated.
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 323
324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn
clockwise until the jack head is properly
engaged in the described location.
Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack
is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the swivel wrench. Raise
the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained
to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles
with wheel covers, remove the cover from
the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel
cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle,
located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start
inflating the inflatable spare after the tire
has been mounted to the vehicle. Secure
the wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts
with the wrench. After inflation, once the
vehicle is lowered you will have a second
opportunity to “torque” the lug nuts.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60
psi (4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air
Compressor or Tire Service Kit if equipped.
Refer to “Portable Air Compressor” in this
section for usage procedure if equipped.
Refer to “Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire” in
this section for usage procedure if equipped.
9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare
has reached its pressure and the
compressor-hose has been removed from
the tire valve.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with
the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire
is mounted incorrectly.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 324
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. Refer to “Wheel And Tire
Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for proper wheel lug nut
torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray
cover assembly in the rear cargo area.
Do
not stow the deflated tire in the inflatable
spare tire location. Have the full-sized tire
repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage
compartment and place the access panel
back. The stud of the storage area must be
threaded through the lower part of the jack.
Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to
secure it in place.
NOTE:
Stow the foam tray and components in the
cargo area.
Storing The Jack
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two lug
nuts on the mounting studs which are on
each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 325
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
the valve stem on the wheel. Install the
cover by hand, snapping the cover over the
two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the
wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no
play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened
once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an
improperly seated wheel under vehicle load
can damage the threads, cause vibration,
and undermine safety.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. Refer to “Wheel And Tire
Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifi-
cations” for proper wheel lug nut torque. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts
are properly seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the
wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no
play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened
once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an
improperly seated wheel under vehicle load
can damage the threads, cause vibration,
and undermine safety.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifi-
cations” in the “Technical Specifications”
section for proper wheel lug nut torque. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 326
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327
(Continued)
Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable
Air Compressor. Use the Portable Air
Compressor located in the side compartment of
the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to
60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Portable Air Compressor
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable
Spare Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from
the storage location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described in
the Jacking Instructions within this
section.
3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as
described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual. Make sure
that the valve stem is located near the
ground, and then screw the air hose of the
Portable Air Compressor to the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and connect
it the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet.
5. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Portable Air
Compressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on the
wheel or if the vehicle equipped with
the inflatable spare tire pressure
indicated on the Tire and Loading information
label located on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation
button to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the
recommended pressure, lower the
vehicle with the jack as described in the
Jack Instructions section in this manual.
9. Remove the speed limit label
sticker from the Portable Air
Compressor and place it on the center
of the steering wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the
foam tray and secure it with the strap. Store
the foam tray in the cargo area.
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
WARNING!
Do not lift or carry the Portable Air
Compressor by the hose.
Always stow the Portable Air Compressor
only in the provided place.
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 327
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
Service Kit. Use the Tire Service Kit located in
the side compartment of the cargo area to
inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air mode
operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the
Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes over-inflated.
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may
get hot after use, so it should be handled
carefully.
Keep the Portable Air Compressor away
from open flames or heat source.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 328
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329
(Continued)
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit
when running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) and
cycle the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Ensure the park brake is engaged.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the
storage location.
2. Uncoil the Sealant/Air Hose.
Remove the cap from the valve stem
and then screw the fitting in at the
end of the Sealant/Air Hose clockwise
onto the valve stem.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit on the ground next
to the deflated tire.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.
5. Engage parking brake before turning the
engine ON.
6. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
7. Turn the Mode Select Knob to Air
Mode position.
WARNING!
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with
eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 329
330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Do not fill inflatable spare tire with sealant.
Refer to “Tire Service Kit” in this chapter for
repairing tires.
8. Switch the power button ON.
9. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on the
wheel or if the vehicle equipped with
the inflatable spare tire pressure
indicated on the Tire and Loading information
label located on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation
button to reduce the tire air pressure.
10. After the tire reaches the
recommended pressure, lower the
vehicle with the jack as described in the
Jack Instructions section in this manual.
11. Remove the speed limit label
sticker from the Tire Service Kit and
place it on the center of the steering
wheel.
12. Return the Tire Service Kit to the foam tray
and secure it with the strap. Store the foam
tray in the cargo area.
Return Inflatable Spare Tire
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage
location.
1. Return the Jack.
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service
Kit or Portable Air Compressor and push the
deflation button to do this step. Refer to
“Portable Air Compressor” in this section for
additional information. The inflatable spare
tire will return to its original shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its
original stowage location and position
facing outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel
installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air
Compressor (if equipped) and tighten the
strap.
7. Install access panel door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire
Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will
provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 330
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and
is stored in the storage bin located behind the
rear cargo trim panel.
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump
operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the
Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes over-inflated.
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 331
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system.
Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
section for further information.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use
and needs to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immedi-
ately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire
and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended
to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread/contact surface of your
vehicle’s tires.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to
seal punctures on the tires' side walls.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory
Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the
air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select
Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such
items to avoid injecting sealant into them.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 332
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) and
cycle the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 333
334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob
is to the Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button,
the sealant (white fluid) will flow
from the Sealant Bottle through
the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant
Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to
turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another
vehicle, if available. Make sure the vehicle is
running before turning the Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump
until sealant is no longer flowing
through hose (typically takes
30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant
flows through the Sealant Hose, the
Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi
(4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar)
to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant
Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air
into the tire immediately after the
Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue
to operate the pump and inflate
the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure
found on the tire and loading information
label located in the driver-side door
opening. Check the tire pressure by looking
at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-
tance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to
the recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn
the Tire Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label
from the Tire Service Kit and
place sticker on the steering
wheel.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 334
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the
Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Proceed to “Drive Vehicle.”
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to
ensure distribution of the Tire Service
Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever
You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section
before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground next to the deflated
tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and
insert the plug into the vehicle's
12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the
fitting at the end of the hose onto
the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
turn to the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire
by reading the Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn
on Tire Service Kit and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to
the recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat
tire repair. Have the tire inspected and
repaired or replaced after using the Tire
Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you. Have the tire checked
as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 335
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to
“Sealant Bottle Replacement” in this
section for further information.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Unwrap The Hose
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to
release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps reverse order.
Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized service centers.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 336
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly so please follow
the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
Remote Positive Post
Remote Negative Post
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
place the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all
unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 337
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive
(+)
post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jumper cable to the remote negative post
near the windshield cowl (exposed metal
part of the discharged vehicle’s engine).
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in personal
injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 338
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is
located with the spare tire (if equipped) or in the
upper storage bin. If your vehicle is out of fuel
and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the
funnel into the filler neck and proceed to fill the
vehicle.
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel
System refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in
“Starting And Operating” in this manual.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge
reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn
the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 339
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual
Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is to the lower left of the
steering column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is
connected to a red tether strap. Pull the tether
strap out as far as it will go, then release it.
The transmission should now be in NEUTRAL
(N), allowing the vehicle to be moved.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released posi-
tion, the tether will remain outside of the trim
panel and the access cover cannot be rein-
stalled.
5. Release the parking brake only when the
vehicle is securely connected to a tow
vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release
it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever
back to its original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully
and re-install the access cover. If the access
cover cannot be re-installed, repeat steps 1
through 4.
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to
maintain control of the vehicle before
activating the Manual Park Release. If
possible, you should apply the parking brake.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or
properly connected to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 340
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you
must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC OFF" switch to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial
Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety”
for further information. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the "ESC OFF" switch again to
restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 341
342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow
bar or other towing device to main structural
members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if
rear wheels are on the ground), to avoid inad-
vertent Electric Park Brake (EPB) engagement.
The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or
disabled via the customer programmable
features in the Uconnect Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total elec-
trical failure when the Electric Parking Brake
(EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack
to raise the rear wheels off the ground when
moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery
Points that can be used to recover a disabled
vehicle, located on the underbody of the
vehicle.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 342
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343
(Continued)
NOTE:
Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are
properly seated and secured in the attach-
ment points.
This recovery tow feature should be used by
a trained professional only.
Use approved receptacle location to free the
disabled vehicle from its environment.
Front Recovery Points
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric
Park Brake whenever the driver's door is
opened (if the ignition is ON, transmission is not
in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are
towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/
RUN mode, you must manually disable the Elec-
tric Park Brake each time the driver's door is
opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park
Release” in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the
vehicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the
vehicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
CAUTION! (Continued)
6
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 343
344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
Do not use sling-type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 344
345
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Severe
Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder, fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the required maintenance intervals.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and
replace if necessary.
X
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs
1
.
X
Replace the front accessory drive belt. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Air Cleaner 8 — Windshield Washer Fill
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Maintain the oil level between the
MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding
one quart or one liter of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on
these engines.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual washer
fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel,
and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, nor is periodic maintenance
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aera-
tion, or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Gasoline Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to the “Engine Compartment”
illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
Engine Air Cleaner
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
varies considerably. Only high quality filters
should be used to ensure most efficient service.
Mopar engine air cleaners are a high quality
filter and are recommended.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal.
These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across)
are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
along a rib must be replaced. Also, have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords,
or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (Cabin
Air Filter)
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information located
online, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove
compartment.
Glove Compartment
2. Open the glove compartment door partially,
leaving extra slack on the glove
compartment tension tether. Detach the
glove compartment tension tether by sliding
the black tension tether clip down, and
popping it out of the slot on the side of the
glove compartment door.
3. There are glove compartment travel stops
on either side of the glove compartment
door. To release them, push inward on each
travel stop, and pull the glove compartment
door down until the travel stops pass clear
of their hooking points.
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as
possible to gain access to the cabin air filter
compartment cover.
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
5. Pry up the lid of each individual
compartment snap, and detach it from the
rest of the snap. There is a small space on
the side of each snap to use for separating
the lid from the snap. Once detached,
remove the rest of the snap completely from
the compartment cover.
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the
compartment cover to gain access to the
fresh air inlet.
Fresh Air Inlet
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each
of the retaining tabs from their hooking
points, and then pulling the filter cover out
to expose the cabin air filter. Remove the air
filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor.
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter
cover, making sure the retaining tabs are
fully secured into their housings.
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment
cover, and reinsert the snaps into their
slots. Push the snap lids until fully attached.
11. Push the glove compartment door to the
near closed position to reengage the glove
compartment travel stops. Finally, pull the
glove compartment tension tether clip down
and slide it back into the slot on the side of
the glove compartment door.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding
the wiper arm with one hand and separating
the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the
other hand (move the wiper blade toward the
right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper
blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
release tab open and the blade side of the
wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm
as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Blade
3 — Wiper Arm
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
(Continued)
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further informa-
tion.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However,
it is important to keep the engine properly tuned
to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
WARNING! (Continued)
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
Cooling System Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by
an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/
C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold,
the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed
to maintain the proper level, it should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum compo-
nents.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and
increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the
“Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services
or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
area before removing the cap. If necessary, add
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”
in “Technical Specifications” for further infor-
mation. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper
type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at
the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of
the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision.
Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for
temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
Install on front tires only.
For a 235/65R17 or 235/60R18 tire, use of
a snow traction device with a maximum
projection of 9 mm beyond the tire profile is
recommended.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the
proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for
any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more
than a month, observe the following
precautions:
Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and
possibly airy location the windows open
slightly.
Check that the Electric Park Brake is not
engaged.
Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the
battery post and be sure that the battery is
fully charged. During storage check battery
charge quarterly.
If you do not disconnect the battery from the
electrical system, check the battery charge
every 30 days.
Clean and protect the painted parts by
applying protective waxes.
Clean and protect polished metal parts by
applying protective waxes.
Apply talcum powder to the front and rear
wiper blades and leave raised from the glass.
Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover
taking care not to damage the painted
surface by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do
not use plastic sheeting which will not allow
the evaporation of moisture present on the
surface of the vehicle.
Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi
(+0.5 bar) higher than recommended on the
tire placard and check it periodically.
Do not drain the vehicle’s cooling system.
Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for
two weeks or more, idle the vehicle for
approximately five minutes, with the air
conditioning system on and high fan speed.
This will ensure proper lubrication of the
system, thus minimizing the possibility of
damage to the compressor when the vehicle
is put back into operation.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative
terminals to the battery, wait at least a
minute with ignition switch in the OFF position
and close the drivers door. When
reconnecting the positive and negative
terminals to the battery be sure the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the drivers
door is closed.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 385
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 386
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap
is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
is not required to maintain the original
condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather seats, as damage to the seat may
result.
7
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 387
388
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on
the left front corner of the instrument panel and
is visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 388
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 389
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted octane number
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not
required, as it will not provide any benefit over
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from
the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if
the engine is heard making a heavy knocking
sound, see an authorized dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87
can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
8
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 389
390 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 390
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 391
(Continued)
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
8
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 391
392 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 392
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 393
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 19 Gallons 71 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20 , API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula)
13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty Cooling
13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cooling
12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cooling
12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
8
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 393
394 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 394
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 395
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 395
396 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be
used.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 396
397
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C Nav With 8.4-inch Display system, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety related
systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 397
398 MULTIMEDIA
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings
Uconnect 4 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
Press the Apps button then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the settings menu screen and press the
Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of
the screen to move up or down through the
available settings. Settings gives you to access
all of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at
a time.
Depending on the vehicle options, feature
settings may vary.
To change features, select the desired feature.
This will bring you to the available options for
the feature. Change feature settings as desired
by pressing and releasing the preferred setting
option until a check-mark appears next to the
setting. Once the desired selection is made,
either press the Back Arrow or the X button on
the touchscreen to close the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the
touchscreen allows you to toggle through the
available settings. The list of programmable
features include:
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “ON/RUN” position.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 398
MULTIMEDIA 399
KeySense
This feature allows you to control specific settings when the KeySense key is in use. The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique 4-digit
PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first time. This 4-digit PIN can only be reset by an authorized dealer.
After pressing the KeySense button on the touchscreen, and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed
is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can
be enabled with “Sound Only” or “Sound and Display.”
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the Park Assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize auton-
omous braking to stop the vehicle.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, it will alert, visibly and/or audibly, to indicate objects are in your blind spot. The “Blind Spot Alert”
feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the exterior mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as
well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the
fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor
that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 399
400 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.
Maximum Vehicle Speed + -
NOTE:
The “Maximum Vehicle Speed” feature can be set to 65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105, 110 km/h).
Start Up Fuel Level Message On Off
Early Low Fuel Alert On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness Headlights ON + -
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 400
MULTIMEDIA 401
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position. The setting can be changed from 1-10.
Display Brightness Headlights OFF + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Control Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the
vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 401
402 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption” [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or
km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours +
-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 402
MULTIMEDIA 403
Camera — If Equipped
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync Time With GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera Delay — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10
seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the surround view camera display whenever the gear selector
is put into REVERSE or the surround view camera guidelines button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touch-
screen display.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines On Off
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 403
404 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” setting overlays the Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the
width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Medium High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
Front ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
Surround View Camera Delay — If
Equipped
On Off
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 404
MULTIMEDIA 405
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10
seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera Guidelines
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the surround view camera display whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE or the surround view camera guidelines button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guidelines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” setting overlays the Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the
width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the BSM system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
Keysense — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 405
406 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the Mirror & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse — If Equipped On Off
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Headlights with Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Brake Service Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether or you would like to retract the park brakes to allow brake system service.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 406
MULTIMEDIA 407
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 60 sec
30 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 sec 60 sec
30 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights Yes No
NOTE:
When “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only available if allowed by law
in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Flash Lights With Power Sliding Door On Off
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 407
408 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
(N) position and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock — If
Equipped
On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If
Equipped
Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If
Equipped
On Off
1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks — If
Equipped
Driver All
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 408
MULTIMEDIA 409
NOTE:
When the “1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks” feature’s “Driver” option is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock
button; you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first
press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver”
is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door
opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry On Off
Hands Free Power Liftgate — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Power Liftgate Alert” feature is selected, an alert plays when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Hands Free Power Sliding Door On Off
NOTE:
The “Sliding Door Alert” feature only occurs when the hands-free feature is used, and not for other methods of opening the sliding door.
Flashing Lights with Power Sliding
Door — If Equipped
On Off
Hands Free Power Lift Gate On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 409
410 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Hands Free Power Sliding Door On Off
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob
— If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors,
steering column position, and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat returns to the memorized seat location, if the settings is set to “On”, when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start (if equipped)
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 410
MULTIMEDIA 411
Key Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Key Off Power Delay — If Equipped
0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), DVD video system
(if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 411
412 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting, as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade
Up Arrow
Button
Down Arrow
Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right Arrow
Button
Center “C” Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the
front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the C Button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness Yes No
NOTE:
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlay On Off
NOTE:
The “AutoPlay” setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connect device as soon as it is connected.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 412
MULTIMEDIA 413
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default),
and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Sirius ID
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 413
414 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings to Default Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings to Default” feature is selected it resets all settings to their default settings.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 414
MULTIMEDIA 415
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of
the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting option until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, either press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen
to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 415
416 MULTIMEDIA
KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique four-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the
first time. This four-digit PIN can only be reset by an authorized dealer.
After pressing the KeySense button on the touchscreen, and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Near Med Far
Forward Collision Warning Active
Braking — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Forward Collision Warning Active Braking” feature is selected, the Advanced Brake Assist (ABA) applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h).
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound & Display
Front ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the Park Assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize auton-
omous braking to stop the vehicle.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Lights Lights & Chime
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 416
MULTIMEDIA 417
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, it will alert you, visibly and/or audibly, to indicate objects that are in your blind spot. The “Blind Spot
Alert” feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a
visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, BSM will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will
result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Maximum Vehicle Speed - +
NOTE:
The “Maximum Vehicle Speed” feature can be set to 65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105 or 110 km/h).
Start Up Fuel Level Message On Off
Earlier Low Fuel Alert On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Sirius ID
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 417
418 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of
the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language List of Languages
NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 418
MULTIMEDIA 419
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Manual Auto
Display Brightness Headlights ON + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness Headlights OFF + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Set Theme On Off
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on
the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 419
420 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Control Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups In
Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the
vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed in
Cluster
On Off
Ready to Drive Pop-Up — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption” [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or
km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of measurement independently.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 420
MULTIMEDIA 421
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never With Help Always
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 421
422 MULTIMEDIA
Camera — If Equipped
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while backing up.
Surround View Camera Delay — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround View camera display whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View Camera Guidelines button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 422
MULTIMEDIA 423
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the
width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned Off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid
a potential frontal collision. When the “Only Warning” option is selected a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of
you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of
a potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 423
424 MULTIMEDIA
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the
system warns you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives you
the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles. The default setting is “Med”.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Med Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible
lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is
less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can
be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound and Display.”
Front ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
(if equipped)
On Off
Sliding Door Alert — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sliding Door Alert” feature is selected, a chime plays when the sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 424
MULTIMEDIA 425
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors,
or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the BSM system
is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to
specification.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
KeySense — If Equipped On Off
Surround View Camera —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while backing up.
Surround View Camera Delay —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK
(P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera Guidelines—
If Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 425
426 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the Mirror & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround View camera display whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View Camera Guidelines button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK (P), or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera
ActiveGuide Lines —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the
width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse On Off
Headlights with Wipers On Off
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 426
MULTIMEDIA 427
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Brake Service Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether or you would like to retract the park brakes to all break system service.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
doors are unlocked with the key fob.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 427
428 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only available if allowed by law
in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Flash Lights With Sliding Door On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 428
MULTIMEDIA 429
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If
Equipped
On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When the “1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks” feature’s “Driver” option is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock
button; you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first
press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
“Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry On Off
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors,
steering column position, and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat returns to the memorized seat location, if the settings is set to “On,” when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Hands Free Power Liftgate On Off
NOTE:
When the “Power Liftgate Alert” feature is selected, an alert plays when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Hands Free Power Sliding Door On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sliding Door Alert” feature is selected, a chime plays when the sliding door reverses or an obstacle is sensed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 429
430 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the Seats & Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Key Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Flash Lights with Sliding Door On Off
Hands Free Sliding Door On Off
Hands Free Power Lift Gate On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-on Dr Heat/Vent Seat &
Steering Wheel — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
Key Off Power Delay — If Equipped
0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 430
MULTIMEDIA 431
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), DVD video system
(if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting, as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 431
432 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Do Not Disturb List Of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default),
and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 432
MULTIMEDIA 433
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of
the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 433
434 MULTIMEDIA
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Accessibility — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray™ and USB Video functions, when it
is activated. For example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce “Play button selected”, and then once pressed
again the Play button will perform its action.
Video Button Readback On Off
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 434
MULTIMEDIA 435
Restore Settings To Default
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Settings To Default OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Software License” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 435
436 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Ensure that all persons read this manual
carefully before using the system. It contains
instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 436
MULTIMEDIA 437
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
which could scratch the touchscreen surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to
clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY
Introduction
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1. Radio
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen
to enter Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes: AM, FM, and SXM can be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons on
the touchscreen in Radio Mode.
2. Media
Press the Media button on the touchscreen
to access media sources such as USB De-
vice, AUX, and Bluetooth® as long as the re-
quested media is present.
3. Climate
Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further details.
4. Apps
Press the Apps button on the touchscreen
to access Smartphone and Connected vehi-
cle options.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 437
438 MULTIMEDIA
5. Controls
Press the Controls button on the touch-
screen to adjust the heated and vented
seats or heated steering wheel (If
Equipped).
6. Phone
Press the Phone button on the touchscreen
to access the Uconnect Phone feature.
7. Settings
Press the Settings button on the touch-
screen to access the Uconnect Settings
menu.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down
onto the main menu bar, will now be an active
App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Radio Mode
Radio Controls
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio – If Equipped
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen,
bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The
different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can
then be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons in the Radio mode.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 438
MULTIMEDIA 439
Volume/Power Control
Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off
the screen and mute the radio. Push the
Volume/Power control knob a second time to
turn the screen back on and unmute the radio.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume/Power
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
Tune/Scroll Control
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Screen Close
The X button on the touchscreen at the top right,
provides a means to close the Direct Tune
Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto
closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds.
Seek And Direct Tune Functions
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left Steering
Wheel Audio Control up or down.
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel. During a Seek Up
function, if the radio reaches the starting station
after passing through the entire band two times,
the radio will stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The
radio stops at the next available station or channel
when the button on the touchscreen is released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel. During a Seek
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channel at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen
located at the bottom of the radio screen. The
Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is
available in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes and
can be used to direct tune the radio to a desired
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
bottom left on the touchscreen.
OK
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press the OK button, and the Direct
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 439
440 MULTIMEDIA
Tune screen will close. The system will
automatically tune to that station.
The selected Station or Channel number is
displayed in the Direct Tune text box.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the six
Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. A set of six presets are visible at
the top of the radio screen.
You can switch between the two radio presets
by pressing the Arrow button located in the
upper right of the radio touchscreen.
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/
SCROLL knob, or by pressing the Up and Down
arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Preset and returns to the main
radio screen.
Deleting Presets
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by
pressing the X button on the touchscreen when
in the Browse Presets screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.
SiriusXM® All Access Package
All satellite radio equipped vehicles come with a
one year trial to the SiriusXM® All Access
package, providing over 160 channels of the
best programming for all the places life takes
you.
In your vehicle — You’ll get every channel
available on your radio, including all the
premium programming like Howard Stern,
every NFL® game, every MLB® game, every
NASCAR® race, Oprah Radio, and more.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 440
MULTIMEDIA 441
On the go — With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio
subscription included with the All Access trial,
you’ll get SiriusXM® on your computer,
smartphone, or tablet. Including:
A huge On Demand catalog
Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM®
Latino – a collection of Spanish-language
channels
MySXM – allowing you to personalize
your favorite music channels
Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more
information
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to
continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will
automatically renew and bill at then-current
rates until you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349
to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All
fees and programming subject to change. Our
satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA
and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our
Internet radio service is available throughout
our satellite service area and in AK. © 2021
SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. Service available in Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver,
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Pre-View channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents call:
1-877-438-9677
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The Genre is displayed below the Presets
Bar.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 441
442 MULTIMEDIA
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see
Presets, browse, Tune Knob, and Direct Tune.
In addition to the tuning Operation functions
common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather Jump, and fav button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen, any time during the Replay mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the
touchscreen to pause the playing of live or
rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed again by pressing of the Pause/Play
button on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the RW button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The Radio begins playing the content at the
point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds.
Forwarding of the content can only be done
when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, can not be done for live content. A
continuous press of the FW button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The
Radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume playing of Live content.
Favorites
Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
in five seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X in the top right corner.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist, or song that is currently playing.
The Radio then uses this information to alert
you when either the favorite song, or favorite
artist are being played at any time by any of the
SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Artist, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Song, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on
the touchscreen.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 442
MULTIMEDIA 443
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button at the left of the Browse
Screen.
Channel List
Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all
the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre
Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to
display a list of Genres. You can select any
desired Genre by pressing the Genre list, the
Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the
selected Genre.
Presets
Press the Presets button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up
and down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset. When
selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored
in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio
screen.
Deleting A Preset
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can Icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual
alert when one of your favorites is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 443
444 MULTIMEDIA
Select Teams
Press the Select Teams button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Selections or
press the Trash Can Icon next to the Selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Featured
Press the Featured button, located on the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides a list
of your featured favorite stations.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio
main menu or within the Settings main menu, to
activate the Audio settings screen for adjusting
Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted
Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto
Play, and Radio Off With Door.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the X located at the top right.
Balance & Fade
Balance & Fade
Press the Balance & Fade button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between the
rear and front speakers.
Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons
or press and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Equalizer
Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen
to activate the Equalizer screen.
Press the + or – buttons, or by pressing and
dragging over the level bar for each of the
equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the
bottom of each of the Bands.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 444
MULTIMEDIA 445
Speed Adjusted Volume
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the
touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted
Volume screen.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the
automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases
automatically as speed increase to compensate
for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the On button on the touchscreen to
activate Surround Sound. Press Off to
deactivate this feature.
When Surround Sound is On, you can hear
audio coming from every direction as in a movie
theatre or home theatre system.
Surround Sound
Loudness
Loudness
Press the On button on the touchscreen to
activate Loudness. Press Off to deactivate this
feature.
When Loudness is On, the sound quality at
lower volumes improves.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 445
446 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Volume Offset
AUX Volume Offset
Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the
touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset
screen.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing
of the + and – buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus three, is displayed above
the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
Auto Play
Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen
to activate the Auto Play screen.
The Auto Play feature has two settings On and
Off. With Auto Play on, music will begin to play
from a connected device, immediately after it is
connect to the radio.
Radio Off With Door
Radio Off With Door
Press the Radio Off With Door button on the
touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door
screen.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when
activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened, or when the Radio
Off Delay selected time has expired.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 446
MULTIMEDIA 447
Media Mode
USB/iPod® Mode
Overview
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB device or iPod® and cable into the USB
Port or by pressing the Select Source button on
the left side of the display, and then selecting
USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped).
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device/iPod®. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection or to return to
the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device/iPod® is within the first three
seconds of the current selection.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
display the browse window. The left side of the
browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device/
iPod®. If supported by the device, you can
browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums,
Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left
side of the screen. The center of the browse
window shows items and its sub-functions,
which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob
can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: USB.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat
button on the touchscreen is highlighted when
active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
is active. Press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® device in
random order to provide an interesting change of
pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen
a second time to turn this feature off.
Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the
Info button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When
in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the
Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated
by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start
playing that track.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 447
448 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Mode
Overview
AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the display.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch
to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert
the device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: AUX.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth® device, containing music, to the
Uconnect System.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect System.
NOTE:
See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect
Phone section for more details.
To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select
Source button on the left side of the display,
and then select Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth® Mode
Seek Up /Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to
the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
Bluetooth® device is within the first second of
the current selection.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 448
MULTIMEDIA 449
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®.
Tracks
If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature,
press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
Android Auto™ & Apple CarPlay® — If
Equipped
Android Auto™
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or
higher powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and
a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with Google's
best-in-class speech technology, the steering
wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your
radio faceplate, and the radio display’s
touchscreen to control many of your apps. To
use Android Auto™, follow the following
procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered
smartphone to one of the media USB ports
in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in, the app will begin to
download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
3. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the “Phone” icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Android
Auto™ Icon.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 449
450 MULTIMEDIA
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Hands-free Calling, and Texting for communi-
cation
Hundred of compatible apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Android Auto™ Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google
to take you to a desired destination by voice.
You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Android Auto™ to access Google Maps™.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
navigation command said launches the built-in
Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
Android Auto™ Maps
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US Residents) https:/
/www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto (Canadian
Residents).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Android Auto™ Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™, for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 450
MULTIMEDIA 451
Android Auto™ Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to the Android Auto™.
This will allow you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls.
Android Auto™ Apps
The Android Auto™ App will display all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app for it to
work with Android Auto™.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
of available apps for Android Auto™.
Apple CarPlay® Integration
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the “Phone” icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
CarPlay® Icon.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 451
452 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
Apple CarPlay® Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri
voice recognition session. You can also press
and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you
to make calls or listen to voice mail as you
normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in VR session,
not a Siri session, and it will not function with
Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
artists, playlists, and music from iTunes®.
Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
use select third party audio apps including
music, news, sports, podcasts and more.
Apple CarPlay® Messages
Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay® allows you to
use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri
can also read incoming text messages, but
driver’s will not be able to read messages, as
everything is done via voice.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
To use your Apple Maps® for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch Apple CarPlay®, and
push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to use Siri to set your desired destination.
Alternatively, choose a nearby destination by
pressing Destinations and selecting a category,
by launching Siri from the destinations page, or
even by typing in a destination.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
NOTE:
If the Voice Recognition (VR) button is not held,
and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR
prompts you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 452
MULTIMEDIA 453
Apple CarPlay® Apps
To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®,
you must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/
ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the
latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
Tricks
AutoPlay
AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system
that automatically begins playing music off of
the connected device, as soon as it is
connected. This feature can be turned on or off
in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio
Settings category. It’s default setting is on.
NOTE:
AutoPlay® is not supported by Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ for the first
time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone will automatically pair to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ features cannot be used with
Bluetooth®, a USB connection is required for its
use. Android Auto™ uses both Bluetooth® and
USB connections to function, and the
connected device will be unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one
that will be used to place hands-free phone calls
or send hands-free text messages. However,
another device can also be paired to the
Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio
source, so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
If using a Samsung device, every time it is
connected to a media USB, and there is
another device plugged in, you will need to
manually change the configuration of the
USB connection in order for the Samsung
device to send data.
The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will
be unavailable when Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay® are in use.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 453
454 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Mode
Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following
features:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free text message replying. (Forward
one of 18 pre-defined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages).
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show incoming
calls,” “Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed
Calls,” “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
NOTE:
Examples of Voice Commands are provided
throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the
Voice Command Quick Reference Section.
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and calling contacts from phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting favorite contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the main phone
screen.
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply With Text Message
* — Conference Call feature only available on
Global System Mobile (GSM) mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all
mobile phones [requires Bluetooth® Message Ac-
cess Profile (MAP) profile]
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 454
MULTIMEDIA 455
Viewing and calling contacts from recent call
logs.
Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.
Listening to music on your Bluetooth® device
via the touchscreen.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents — visit UconnectPhone.com or
call:
877-855-8400
Canadian residents — (English) call:
800-465-2001
or (French) call:
800-387-9983
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology - the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect
Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or
briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on
and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect
Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked
to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 455
456 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering
wheel is used to get into the phone mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing
calls, view phonebook etc.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and
when you are already in a call and you want to
send tones or make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect
Voice Command section for direction on how to
use the button.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the
vehicle's audio system. The volume of the
Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from
the radio volume control knob or from the
steering wheel radio control.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect
Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contact” and when asked “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to.”
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 456
MULTIMEDIA 457
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the
system requires more information from the user
it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on your steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if
active) on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button (if active) on your steering wheel when
the system is listening for a command and be
returned to the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to
reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on
the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 457
458 MULTIMEDIA
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
Pairing A Phone
If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Set-
tings button from the Uconnect Phone main
screen.
Select “Paired Phones”, and then press
the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
screen while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the PIN number.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 458
MULTIMEDIA 459
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue-
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
screen while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest phone paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Media button on the
touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, enter the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 459
460 MULTIMEDIA
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or Audio Device, follow these
steps:
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Sources button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the
particular Audio Device. A pop-up menu will
appear, press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 460
MULTIMEDIA 461
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
Phone or Audio Device than the currently
connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Delete Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone automatically
downloads names (text names) and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature.
See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phone book, follow the procedure in the
“Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips”
section.
Automatic download and update of a phone
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 461
462 MULTIMEDIA
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
Favorites.
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the Down arrow symbol button next to the
selected number to display the options
pop-up. In the pop-up select Add to
Favorites.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next select the Down arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that favorite contact.
3. Press Remove from Favs.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a
phone call with Uconnect Phone.
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 462
MULTIMEDIA 463
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Dial 151-123-4444.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
151-123-4444.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
associated with John Doe, or if there are
multiple numbers it will ask which number
you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Answer
End
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press Call.
If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the
steering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone
End) press the VR button to send a touch-tone
and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is
stored in your mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the recent
calls button on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and say “Show my incoming
calls” from any screen and the incoming calls
will be displayed.
NOTE:
Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent”, or “Missed.”
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 463
464 MULTIMEDIA
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel to accept the call. You can also
press the Answer button on the touchscreen or
press the caller ID box.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Press the
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID
box to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an
incoming call when another call is in progress.
Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were
using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold button on
the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back
to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls”
in this section. To combine two calls, refer to
“Join Calls” in this section.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 464
MULTIMEDIA 465
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
Phone End button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Browsing SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
view and manage the last 10 SMS messages
received on the instrument panel. To use this
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument
panel menu, and then select “SMS Reader”
using the arrow keys on the steering wheel
controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last
10 SMS messages to be displayed.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
Bluetooth® connection between a Uconnect
Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect
Phone, follow the instructions described in your
mobile phone User's Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least
½-inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 465
466 MULTIMEDIA
Performance is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Condition
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name
recognition rate is optimized when the entries
are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for
“0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose
connection to the Uconnect Phone. When this
happens, the connection can generally be
re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least
15 seconds prior to using the system.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 466
MULTIMEDIA 467
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions. Both controls
are rocker-type switches with a push button in
the center.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” Up for
the next listenable station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” Down for the
next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track,
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
NOTE:
While In Media Mode, the center button on the
left rocker switch is nonfunctional.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 467
468 MULTIMEDIA
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located
throughout the vehicle. This feature allows an
external USB device to be plugged into the USB
port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
The data USB ports are located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
There are multiple USB “Charge Only” ports in
this vehicle.
In the center console
On the back of the front row seats in the
Uconnect Theater Media hubs
Above the rear cup holders in the third row of
seats
Center Console USB Charging Port
NOTE:
The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument
panel can be switched from ignition only to
constant battery powered all the time. See an
authorized dealer for details.
3rd Row USB Charging Port
NOTE:
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge
battery operated USB devices when connected.
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — Uconnect Theater Rear Data USB Port (if
equipped)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 468
MULTIMEDIA 469
UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect Theater Overview
Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your
family years of enjoyment.
There are multiple ways to interact with your
Uconnect Theater system;
Play your favorite CDs, DVDs, or Blu-ray™
Discs
Plug and play a variety of standard video
games or devices into the HDMI port
Listen to audio over the wireless headphones
Plug and play a variety of devices into the
Video USB port
Plug in standard headphones to listen to
audio
Project your mobile phone or tablet screen
onto the rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens
Please review this Owner's Manual to become
familiar with its features and operation.
Getting Started
Uconnect Theater Screen
There are three different ways to operate the
features of the Uconnect Theater:
The Remote Control
The Uconnect System
The Individual Uconnect Theater Touch-
screens
Accessing The System From The Uconnect
System
You can access your Uconnect Theater system
from the radio touchscreen following the steps
below:
Option 1
1. Press the Media button.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button icon.
Option 2
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the
touchscreen. You may need to navigate to
different pages in the Apps drawer to find
the Uconnect Theater button.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Theater icon may be dragged and
dropped down from the Apps drawer to the drag
& drop menu to create an App/shortcut. Refer
to “Drag & Drop Menu Bar” in this section for
more information.
1 — Uconnect Theater Touchscreen (Rear Touch-
screens)
2 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
3 — Uconnect Theater Media Hub (Headphone
Jack, HDMI Input, USB Charge Only Port)
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 469
470 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Theater Controls
Uconnect Theater Summary Screen
Parents can control certain features of the
system with the “Uconnect Theater Controls”
screens, right from the Uconnect touchscreen
radio. Options include:
Change media sources or select Apps by
using the drop-down list
Lock one or both screens
Mute an individual screen or both screens
Turn “On/Off” one or both screens
View media showing on a specific screen
while gear selector is in PARK (P)
Listen in to a particular Uconnect Theater
screen through the vehicle’s sound system
by selecting the “Listen In” feature after
selecting the “Press to Enter” option.
Accessing The System From The Uconnect
Theater Rear Screens
You can also access your Uconnect Theater
system from the rear screens from the steps
below:
1. Lift screen upward, the system will
automatically power on.
NOTE:
A message asking if you would like to pair a
remote will pop up if one has not already been
paired to the system.
2. If “YES” is selected to pair a remote, push
any button on the remote and pairing will
immediately start.
3. If “NO” is selected, the Uconnect Theater
home screen will pop up.
1 — Power All On/Off (Controls Both Screens)
2 — Mute All On/Off (Controls Both Screens)
3 — Lock All On/Off (Controls Both Screens)
4 — Source Drop-Down List for Current Screen
5 — Lock On/Off for Current Screen
6 — Mute On/Off for Current Screen
7 — Power On/Off for Current Screen
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 470
MULTIMEDIA 471
NOTE:
There will be a touchscreen notification
message when pairing is successful.
Test to make sure the remote is successfully
paired by dragging your finger across the
gesture pad. If you do not see the On-screen
Arrow, try using the Screen button on the
remote to switch between rear screen one
and rear screen two to make sure the remote
is controlling the intended screen. It may take
several seconds for the remote to react when
initially paired.
If remote does not pair, refer to “Pairing The
Remote” in this section for an alternative
pairing process.
Pairing The Remote
Remote Pairing
If the remote needs to be paired to your
Uconnect Theater system, follow the procedure
below:
1. Install batteries into both remotes.
2. Press the Settings icon found in the lower
right portion of the Uconnect Theater
touchscreen.
3. Press the Remote button towards the
bottom of the Uconnect Theater
touchscreen, within the settings menu.
4. Press the Pair Remote option. Press the OK
button. A touchscreen notification will
appear indicating that your remote has
been paired successfully or unsuccessfully.
5. Test to make sure the remote is
successfully paired by dragging your finger
across the gesture pad. If you do not see the
On-Screen arrow, try using the Screen
button on the remote to switch between
rear screen one and rear screen two to
make sure the remote is controlling the
intended screen. It may take several
seconds for the remote to react when
initially paired.
NOTE:
If pairing fails, try resetting the remote by pushing
and holding the Play/Pause, Down arrow, and the
Screen button simultaneously for about five
seconds until the back light flashes.
If the remote is ever non-operational, try
re-pairing the remote.
The system can accommodate up to 10
paired remote controls.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 471
472 MULTIMEDIA
Unpairing The Remote
In events such as updating the Uconnect
Theater software, or taking a remote to another
vehicle, the remote will need to be unpaired
from your Uconnect Theater system. To unpair
the remote:
1. Press the Settings icon found in the lower
right portion of the Uconnect Theater
touchscreen.
2. Press the Remote button towards the
bottom of the Uconnect Theater
touchscreen, within the settings menu.
3. Select Manage Remote Controls from the
Remote section of "Settings” and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
unpairing process.
4. Once complete, the remote will be ready to
pair again.
NOTE:
There will be a touchscreen notification
message when unpairing is successful. Repeat
the above steps to unpair a second remote.
Media Sources
Media Source Selection
Users can select content for each screen from
the front radio touchscreen by choosing desired
content from the “Select Input” drop-down
menu. Options include Blu-ray™ Disc, HDMI,
USB, Apps, and Viewing the other rear screen.
NOTE:
Use the “View Screen” function to pull content
from one screen to the other with a single press
of a button. Doing this however will disable and
gray out certain player controls on the screen
viewing the other screen's content.
1 – Selected Source Screen 1
2 – Screen 2 Source Selection Drop Down
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 472
MULTIMEDIA 473
Uconnect Theater Remote Control
Remote Control
1.
Gesture Pad
— Control pointer position by
running your finger over this area and
tapping to select items on the touchscreen,
functions similar to a computer/laptop
mouse.
2. Mute Button — Mutes headphone audio.
3.
Home Button — Push to access available
“Sources”.
4.
Arrow Buttons — Push the Arrow
buttons to highlight an item or scroll
through menus.
5.
Fast Forward Button — Push and hold
to fast forward through the current audio
track or video chapter. Push once to skip to
the next track.
6.
Play/Pause Button ? — Begin/resume or
pause disc play.
7.
Fast Rewind Button — Push and hold to
fast rewind through the current audio track
or video chapter. Push once to revert back
to the previous track.
8.
OK Button — Push to select the highlighted
option in a menu.
9.
Screen Selector Button — Push the screen
selector to toggle between screen 1 (Driver
Side), or screen 2 (Passenger Side).
10.
Back Button — Push to exit out of menus or
return to previous screen.
11.
Power Button — Turns the screen for the
selected channel on or off.
12.
Screen Indicator — Indicates which screen
(1 or 2) is being controlled by the remote
control.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
Each remote control requires two AAA batteries
for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the
back of the remote, then slide the battery
cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery
recycling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram
shown inside the battery compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 473
474 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Theater Home Screen And
Controls
Uconnect Theater Home Screen (Rear Touchscreens)
Source Card Selection
You can choose sources such as HDMI, USB,
Apps, or Blu-ray™. You may also view content of
the opposite screen in one step by choosing the
“View Screen” source card.
NOTE:
Source card order can be changed by
pressing the Settings button on the touch-
screen and scrolling down to "Source Card
Order".
Use the “View Screen” function to pull
content from one screen to the other in a
single press of a button. Doing this however
will disable and gray out certain player
controls on the screen viewing the other
screen's content.
General Settings
To change Source Card order, select “Source
Card Reorder”, then press and hold source card
on the touchscreen, and drag and drop in
desired order.
You can also adjust settings such as:
Brightness
Media port lighting on and off
Clock on and off
NOTE:
System information can also be displayed
under General Settings.
Remote Settings
Under this setting, you can access the following:
Manage Remotes (this allows you to unpair
remotes)
Pair Remote
Remote sensitivity (this adjusts the speed
and sensitivity of cursor on screen when
using gesture pad)
1 — Search Button (Front USB Media Search)
2 — Power Button
3 — Settings Button
4 — Toggle Button List And Icon View
5 — Source Card Page Indicator
6 — Wired Headphone Volume
7 — Rear Climate Control Button
8 — Home Button
9 — Source Cards
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 474
MULTIMEDIA 475
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Brand: Delphi
Model: FCA REMOTE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
Marque: Delphi
Modèle: FCA REMOTE
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Marca: Delphi
Modelo: FCA REMOTE
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Or USB Media File
From Uconnect System
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ Disc or DVD disc into the
disc player with the label facing up, or
insert a USB drive into rear Video USB port.
NOTE:
The DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player and Video USB
port are both located under the radio controls in
the instrument panel.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the
radio touchscreen.
Refer to “Accessing The System From The
Uconnect System” in this section for further
information.
3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls
(i.e. select the desired source from the
“Select Input 1” or “Select Input 2” menu
for the respective screen).
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 475
476 MULTIMEDIA
4. For DVD/Blu-ray™ disc — press the Press to
Enter feature in the Movie Snapshot on the
radio touchscreen, then press “OK” on the
following screen. The steps to start a DVD
are dependent on the steps required by that
specific DVD. For USB Media Files — Press
“Music”, “Movie”, or “Folders”, then select
media title from list(s).
5. To play a DVD/Blu-ray™ disc on both
screens simultaneously, select “Disc” from
both screen drop downs, or choose “Disc
Source” on one screen and push the View
Screen button on the other.
DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Player
Source Controls From The Uconnect System —
Uconnect Theater
Uconnect System Media Control Screen
NOTE:
After selecting “Press to Enter” or the Movie
Snapshot, the control functions for that screen
appears. These controls only apply to the indi-
vidual screen selected and include:
1. Power
Press to turn “Selected Screen” On/Off.
2. Mute
Mute rear headphones for selected source
for the current ignition cycle. Pressing mute
again will unmute rear headphones.
3. Lock
Press to enable/disable Remote Control
functions and Rear Touchscreen Controls
for the selected source.
4. View
Select this button to view full screen video if
vehicle is not moving. Button is disabled
when not viewing a video source or when
the vehicle is in motion.
5. Listen In
Select this button to play one of the rear
screens audio over the vehicle’s audio sys-
tem.
1 — DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Player
2 — USB Port
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 476
MULTIMEDIA 477
NOTE:
To view video content on the radio screen, bring
the vehicle to a stop.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio disc, CD Data disc,
DVD, or Blu-ray™, pushing the remote control’s
Arrow buttons will navigate the cursor on the
rear touchscreen in the desired direction, on
whichever touchscreen is selected. The UP,
DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT Arrow buttons, and the
OK and MENU buttons on the remote, along
with the corresponding buttons overlaid on the
radio touchscreen, can be used to navigate the
disc menu when it appears. This can be used to
select specific chapters in a movie, to navigate
special features, or to play the movie from the
menu.
NOTE:
Inserting a disc into the player will “auto play” the
disc if already in the “Disc" source menu on the
rear screens, and the disc supports “auto play.”
Blu-ray™ Controls – Disc Specific Functions
The four colored buttons (red, green, blue,
yellow) are designed for use with certain
Blu-ray™ disc movie titles to access particular
features or software on the disc. See the
documentation provided with your Blu-ray™
disc movie to see if these buttons can be used.
The 5-way control buttons located to the right of
the four colored buttons, are used to navigate
and select items in the disc’s menu, like play
movie, scene selection, etc.
Rear Touchscreen Blu-ray™ Controls – Disc Specific
Functions
Uconnect Theater Apps
Apps Home Screen
Sudoku App Home Screen
1 — Red Button
2 — Green Button
3 — Blue Button
4 — 5-Way Control Buttons
5 — Move 5-Way Controls Button
6 — Yellow Button
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 477
478 MULTIMEDIA
Select the Apps source card to play pre-loaded
games. Pressing the Help button teaches users
how to play each game. Pick from games:
Back Seat Bingo
Checkers
Hanging Fruit
License Plate Game
Math Flash Cards
Solitaire
Sudoku
Tic Tac Toe
NOTE:
To exit a game, press Exit button then Back
arrow, or Home button on the touchscreen.
Are We There Yet? — Uconnect 4C NAV
Are We There Yet? App
When a navigation route has been set from the
Uconnect system, the second row passengers
can use “Are We There Yet?” for an animated
screen showing distance and time remaining on
navigation routes, as well as the estimated time
of arrival with pop-up notifications. Notifications
and their frequency can be set up for route
information by using the Arrow buttons, and can
be turned on and off using the “Notifications”
button on the “Are We There Yet?” App.
Estimated time of arrival notifications pop up at
the bottom center of the screen.
1 — Decrease Timing Between Notifications But-
ton
2 — Notifications ON/OFF Button
3 — Increase Timing Between Notifications Button
4 — Arrival Time
5 — Time Remaining Until Destination Is Reached
6 — Distance Remaining
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 478
MULTIMEDIA 479
Using The Rear Video USB Port
Rear Video USB Port
Plug in a USB drive, iPhone®, iPod® or mass
storage device and play your favorite music or
movies.
NOTE:
To view USB media on the rear theater screens,
insert a USB drive into the port next to the DVD/
Blu-ray™ Disc player. The USB drive port is
located under the radio controls in the instru-
ment panel.
Search Screen
On the rear screen you can browse the content
of the USB device by going to the USB source.
Use the search feature to find your music faster.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1
or 2 ports, located behind the first row seat.
AUX/HDMI/USB
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games will exceed the
power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter. Refer
to “Power Inverter” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” in this guide for further information.
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 479
480 MULTIMEDIA
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels
of audio using an infrared transmitter from the
video screens.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume
control, there are a number of things that can
be done to troubleshoot the issue:
Verify that the screen is turned on.
Check to see that the channel is not muted.
Make sure that the headphones are on.
Verify that the headphone channel selector
button is on the desired channel. This button
switches between the audio of screen 1 and
screen 2.
Install two new AAA type batteries in the
headphones.
Uconnect Theater Headphones
The headphone power indicator and controls
are located on the right ear cup.
NOTE:
Uconnect Theater must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To
conserve battery life, the headphones will auto-
matically turn off approximately three minutes
after the Uconnect Theater system is turned off.
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
1. Ensure the remote control and the
headphones are on the same channel.
2. Push the Home button on the remote
control.
3. When the Home menu appears on the
touchscreen, use the Arrow buttons on the
remote control to navigate to the available
modes and push the OK button to select the
new mode or use the Gesture Pad at the top
of the remote control.
Headphone Channel Selector Button
1 — Power ON/OFF Button
2 — Volume Control Wheel
3 — Channel Selector Button
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 480
MULTIMEDIA 481
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA
batteries for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left
ear cup of the headphones, and then slide
the battery cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery
recycling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram
shown inside the battery compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty
covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or
"your") of this particular Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”)
wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is
not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This
warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as
specified below, this warranty covers any
Product that in normal use is defective in
workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This
warranty does not cover any damage or defect
that results from misuse, abuse or modification
of the Product other than by Aptiv. Foam
earpieces, which will wear over time through
normal use, are specifically not covered
(replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY
INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR
ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT,
NOR IS APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR
OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE
WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation may not apply to you. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Aptiv
reserves the right to replace any discontinued
Product with a comparable model. THIS
WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS
PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS,
AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments
regarding your Aptiv wireless headphones,
please email hpser[email protected] or phone:
888-293-3332
Display Settings
When watching a video source, pressing the
Settings icon on the touchscreen activates
the Settings menu. These settings control the
appearance of the video on the screen. The
factory default settings are already set for
optimum viewing, so there is no need to change
these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, use one of the
touchscreens or remote. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select “Reset to
Defaults”, then select “YES.”
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 481
482 MULTIMEDIA
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel
with the screen closed:
Set the audio to the desired source and
channel.
Close the video screen.
When the screen is reopened, the video
screen will automatically turn back on and
show the appropriate display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio
heard, verify that the headphones are turned on
(the ON indicator is illuminated) and the
headphone selector switch is on the desired
channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio
on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the
headphones.
Rear Climate Controls
The rear climate controls can also be controlled
using the Uconnect Theater system. Refer to
“Climate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Climate Controls
Icon Description
ON
Climate Control ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate.
OFF
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will
cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for more information.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 482
MULTIMEDIA 483
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the
temperature. The temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue
arrow.
Headliner
Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air
vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level
Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
Floor
Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
Icon Description
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 483
484 MULTIMEDIA
Accessibility — If Equipped
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray™/USB
Video system that announces a function prior to
performing the action. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in this chapter for further information.
Wireless Streaming — If Equipped
Your Uconnect Theater system may be
equipped with Wireless Streaming functionality
that allows you to project your smartphone or
tablet onto your rear Uconnect Theater
touchscreens. This Source Card will allow you to
wirelessly link your compatible Android™
devices to your Uconnect Theater system and
stream your device onto the touchscreens.
Choose the Wireless Streaming Source Card on
your rear Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
Wireless Streaming Source Card
The first row passengers can also access
wireless streaming by choosing the source in
the Uconnect Theater menu on the front
Uconnect touchscreen.
Streaming Source On Front Uconnect Touchscreen
NOTE:
For system compatibility, consult your device's
Owner's Manual or www.uconnectphone.com to
see if your device supports wireless streaming
technology compatibility. Apple® devices do not
support this feature.
To link your device to the rear Uconnect Theater
touchscreens:
1. Enable your device’s Wi-Fi.
2. Select the Wireless Streaming feature on
your device. The name of this feature is
device dependent and could include: mirror,
cast, or smart view.
NOTE:
Refer to your device's Owners Manual or
www.uconnectphone.com for further informa-
tion.
3. Select “Pacifica Wireless Network” from the
list of available networks on your device.
4. When prompted by an Authentication
Screen, press Accept on the touchscreen to
begin wireless streaming on your device. If
prompted, verify that the code on the rear
touchscreen and the device match.
Streaming Device Source Card
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 484
MULTIMEDIA 485
Your phone will be added as an additional
Source Card on the Uconnect Theater
touchscreens.
NOTE:
The Authentication Screen will appear on both
rear touchscreens. The touchscreen screen on
which Accept is selected will be the primary
controller for the wireless streaming session.
NOTE:
Some devices will allow you to control your
device through the Uconnect Theater rear
touchscreens. They will react to your selec-
tions from the touchscreen and be repre-
sented on your device as well. When
supported, the Uconnect Theater task bar will
appear at the top and bottom of the
Uconnect Theater touchscreen, framing your
streaming device.
Devices that do not support this feature will
not respond to Uconnect Theater touch-
screen but can still be controlled using the
streaming device.
Settings
Below is a list of the settings available for the
Wireless Streaming feature of your Uconnect
Theater system:
Wireless Streaming Settings
Wireless: ON/OFF – Turn on and off the wire-
less feature of the Uconnect Theater system.
Manage Devices – Allows the user to delete
the paired devices.
Local Network Name – Allows the user to
rename the Pacifica Wireless Network.
Refer to the Wireless Streaming video on the
Uconnect YouTube Channel at
www.youtube.com/DriveUconnect for tips and
additional information on the Wireless
Streaming function.
BD And DVD Region Codes
Many BD and DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must
match in order for the disc to play. If the region
code for the BD or DVD disc does not match the
region code for the Blu-ray™ Disc player, the
disc will not play. USA and Canada are set for
BD : code A / DVD : code 1.
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray™ Disc player will play CD-R and
CD-RW discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD
format, or as a CD-ROM containing MP3, AAC or
WMA files. The player will also play DVD-Video
content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.
DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are
not supported. Compressed audio and DivX
recorded on DVD is playable.
If you record a disc using a personal computer,
there may be cases where the Blu-ray™ Disc
player may not be able to play some or the
entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compatible
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 485
486 MULTIMEDIA
format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following
guidelines when recording discs.
Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions
that are closed are playable.
For multi-session CDs that contain only
multiple CD-Audio sessions, the player will
renumber the tracks so each track number is
unique.
For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use
the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or
Romeo format. Other formats (such as HFS,
or others) are not supported.
The player recognizes a maximum of 2000
files and 255 folders (includes the ROOT
folder) per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
Mixed media recordable DVD formats will
only play the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that
is playable in the Blu-ray™ Disc player, check
with the disc recording software publisher for
more information about burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling
recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is
with a permanent marker. Do not use adhesive
labels as they may separate from the disc,
become stuck, and cause permanent damage
to the DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA and AAC)
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3), WMA (Windows
Media Audio) files and AAC (Advanced Audio
Coding) from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
CD-RW) or DVD Data disc (usually a DVD-R or
DVD-RW).
The Blu-ray™ Disc player always uses the file
extension to determine the audio format, so
MP3 files must always end with the extension
“.mp3” or “.MP3” and WMA files must always
end with the extension “.wma” or “.WMA”
and AAC files must always end with the exten-
sion and “.aac” or “.AAC” or “m4a”. To
prevent incorrect playback, do not use these
extensions for any other types of files.
For MP3 files, ID3v1, ID3v2 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are
supported.
Any file that is copy protected (such as those
downloaded from many online music stores)
will not play. The Blu-ray™ player will auto-
matically skip the file and begin playing the
next available file.
Other compression formats such as MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The
Blu-ray™ player will automatically skip the file
and begin playing the next available file.
If you are creating your own files, the recom-
mended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is
between 32 and 320Kbps and the recom-
mended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 16 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates
are also supported. For both formats, the
recommended sample rate is either 44.1kHz
or 48kHz.
To change the current file, use the remote
control “Seek Forward” or “Seek Back”
buttons to return to the start of the current or
previous file.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 486
MULTIMEDIA 487
AAC (MPEG-4 AAC, Low Complexity Profile)
support.
AAC HE v1 (AAC High Efficiency v1 aka. AAC/
MPEG4v2 AAC+) support.
HE-AAC v1, v2 support.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the
disc, a "Disc Error" message is displayed on the
rear screen and Radio displays. A dirty,
damaged, or incompatible disc format are all
potential causes for a "Disc Error" message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in
audible or visible errors that persists for two
seconds, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will attempt
to continue playing the disc by skipping forward
one to three seconds at a time. If the end of the
disc is reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt
to play the start of the first track.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during
extremely hot conditions, such as when the
vehicle’s interior temperature is above 140°F
(60.0°C). When this occurs, the player will
display "High Temp" and will shut off the Rear
Seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect
the optics of the Blu-ray™ Disc player.
Product Agreement
Open Source Software
The software built into this product, are
composed of multiple software components,
and there are the copyrights of our company or
third parties in each software component. Also,
in this product, the following open source
software has been installed.
The licensed software for our company is based
on GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE V2.0 ("GPL").
The licensed software for our company is
based on GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC
LICENSE V2.1 ("LGPL").
The software which has the copyrights of a
third party and is distributed as free software.
Please refer the contract details which are
disclosed in the following websites, for
example, concerning these above software.
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/
gpl-2.0-standalone.html, http://www.gnu.org/
licenses/lgpl-2.1-standalone.html.
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
LGPL software. These are distributed in the
hope that it will be useful by itself. However,
including the absence of an implied warranty on
the "suitability for a particular purpose" or
"merchantability", the warranty of any kind will
not be made. You may download Source Code
from the indicating URL by the pressed button
of “Open Source Software” on the Setup Menu.
Also, please refrain from contact about the
contents of the source code of open source. The
source code of the software in which there are
the copyrights of our company or third parties, is
not subject to distribution.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 487
488 MULTIMEDIA
Dolby
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS
For DTS patents, see http://dts.com/patents.
Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and
the Symbol together are registered trademarks,
and DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
DVD
"The DVD logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation." or " DVD logo is a trademark
of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation
registered in the US, Japan and other countries."
BDA
“Blu-ray™ Disc, Blu-ray™, BD-Live, BONUSVIEW,
AVCREC and the logos are trademarks of the
Blu-ray™ Disc Association.”
AVCHD
"AVCHD" and the "AVCHD" logo are trademarks
of Panasonic Corporation and Sony®
Corporation.
BD-J
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or
its affiliates.
MPEG
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A
CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC
VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A
PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY
AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG
LA, L.L.C. SEE WWW.MPEGLA.COM .
DivX
This DivX Certified® device can play DivX®
Home Theater video files up to 576p (including
.avi, .divx). Download free software at
www.divx.com to create, play and cast digital
videos.
kernel 2.6.16.29 FreeType 2 2.2.1 gcc sh4eb 3.4.5 glibc 2.3.5 boot_loader sh-ipl +g 1.00
libgcc_s-3.4.5 bash-3.0-31 busybox 1.00 MAKE DEV 1.1.0 module-init-tools 3.1.0
libtermcap 2.0.8 mtd-utils 20050619 initscripts 8.11.1-1 libstdc+ +3.4.5-10 libiconv 1.11
coreutils 6.9 dosfstools 2.10-3 directfb 1.0.0-rc1 kxml 1.21 binutils-sh4eb 2.16.91.0.2
v2lin 0.1 - - - -
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 488
MULTIMEDIA 489
Cinavia
"Cinavia Notice This product uses Cinavia
technology to limit the use of unauthorized
copies of some commercially-produced film and
videos and their soundtracks. When a
prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is
detected, a message will be displayed and
playback or copying will be interrupted. More
information about Cinavia technology is
provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer
Information Center at http://www.cinavia.com/
. To request additional information about
Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with your
mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer
Information Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego,
CA, 92138, USA.” “This product incorporates
proprietary technology under license from
Verance Corporation and is protected by US
Patent 7,369,677 and other US and worldwide
patents issued and pending as well as copyright
and trade secret protection for certain aspects
of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark of
Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2012
Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by
Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
WARNING!
Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 489
490 MULTIMEDIA
FCC/IC Regulatory Notices
Modification Statement
Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Wireless Notice
This device complies with FCC/IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This transmitter must not be
co-located or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
FCC Class B Digital Device Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 490
MULTIMEDIA 491
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equip-
ment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/
TV technician for help.
CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 491
492 MULTIMEDIA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 492
MULTIMEDIA 493
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect system.
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
NOTE:
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in
the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 4C system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
Reduce background noise. Wind and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone
is positioned on the rearview mirror and
aimed at the driver.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 493
494 MULTIMEDIA
Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recognition
(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button and say, “Help.” The system provides
you with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth® and auxiliary ports (if equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected
USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands and follow the
prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist.
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“
Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “
Play genre Classical”
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media,
Or Climate Functions. For Uconnect 4C NAV Sys-
tem Only: Push To Begin Navigation Function
3 — Push To End Call
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 494
MULTIMEDIA 495
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the
artist, album, song, and genre information is
displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
“
Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“Redial (call previous outgoing phone
number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button and say “
Call,” then
pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has multiple
phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith
work.”
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the Phone button and say “
Listen.”
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say: “
Reply
.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full imple-
mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 495
496 MULTIMEDIA
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Climate
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with
climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
“
Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used
to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust
the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you
know exactly how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800
Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a POI search, push the VR button .
After the beep, say: “
Find nearest coffee shop.”
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages and many other
useful requests.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were
using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 496
MULTIMEDIA 497
NOTE:
Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that supporting Bluetooth® MAP.
Android Auto™ — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™ powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media
USB ports, using the factory-provided USB
cable, and press the new Android Auto™ icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main
menu bar to begin Android Auto™. Push and
hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or
press and hold the “Microphone” icon within
Android Auto™, to activate Android’s™ VR,
which recognizes natural voice commands, to
use a list of your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™,
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a number
of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen.
Connect your iPhone® 5, or higher, to one of the
media USB ports, using the factory-provided
Lightning cable, and press the new Apple
CarPlay® icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on
the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay®.
Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button
within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which
recognizes natural voice commands to use a list
of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
9
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 497
498 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved.
Mopar and Uconnect are registered
trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a
trademark of FCA US LLC. Android™ is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visitwww.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visitwww.siriusxm.ca/
guardian-v1/ or call: 1-877-324-9091
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 498
499
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss
additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to
the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are
vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you
to be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
10
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 499
500 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has
access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate
with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's Service
Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 500
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 501
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and
maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, an
authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://
www.safercar.gov
.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety
defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian
customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP
.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 501
502 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/
troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as well
as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 502
503
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.........................................388
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)..........................................................239
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............362
Additives, Fuel ...............................................390
Adjust
Down........................................................... 49
Forward ....................................................... 49
Rearward..................................................... 49
Up................................................................ 49
Air Bag ...........................................................185
Air Bag Operation ......................................187
Air Bag Warning Light...................... 184, 187
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................192
Enhanced Accident Response......... 196, 344
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................344
Front Air Bag .............................................187
If Deployment Occurs................................195
Knee Impact Bolsters................................192
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............197
Maintenance .............................................197
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............185
Side Air Bags .............................................192
Transporting Pets......................................215
Air Bag Light ............................... 141, 184, 217
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ............................................................ 353
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 354
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 354
Air Conditioner System ................................. 354
Air Conditioning Filter..............................92, 354
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................91
Air Filter ........................................................ 353
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 375
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................................24
Disarm The System .....................................24
Security Alarm .......................................... 144
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................11
Android Auto ................................................. 497
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 361, 393
Disposal ................................................... 363
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 152
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 144
Apple CarPlay................................................ 497
Ashtray.......................................................... 120
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 157
Audio Jack..................................................... 468
Audio Settings............................................... 444
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 397
Automatic Dimming Mirror ........................59, 60
Automatic Headlights.......................................64
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............90
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 228
Automatic Transmission................................ 230
Adding Fluid..................................... 366, 396
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 366
Fluid Change............................................. 366
Fluid Level Check...................................... 365
Fluid Type ........................................365, 396
Special Additives ...................................... 365
AUX Cord ....................................................... 468
Aux Mode ...................................................... 448
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ....... 118
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 396
B
Back-Up Camera ........................................... 283
Battery .................................................143, 350
Charging System Light.............................. 143
Jump Starting ........................................... 337
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................15
Battery Saver Feature ......................................66
Belts, Seat .................................................... 217
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 159
11
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 503
504
Bluetooth
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between
the Uconnect Phone And Mobile
Phone ...................................................465
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................460
Bluetooth Mode.............................................448
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................356
B-Pillar Location.............................................371
Brake Assist System ......................................153
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................153
Brake Fluid ....................................................396
Brake System ...................................... 364, 388
Anti-Lock (ABS)..........................................388
Fluid Check ..................................... 364, 396
Master Cylinder .........................................364
Parking......................................................225
Warning Light ............................................141
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................229
Brightness, Interior Lights................................ 67
Bulb Replacement............................... 306, 309
Bulbs, Light................................. 218, 306, 309
C
Camera..........................................................283
Camera, Rear ...................................... 283, 284
Capacities, Fluid ............................................393
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................................. 286, 339
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 349
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 363
Car Washes................................................... 385
Carbon Monoxide Warning................... 216, 392
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ........................................ 103
Cargo Area Cover .......................................... 103
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier ........................................ 121
Cargo Load Floor........................................... 103
Cargo Tie-Downs........................................... 103
Cellular Phone .............................................. 491
Center High Mounted Stop Light................... 311
Certification Label......................................... 288
Chains, Tire................................................... 382
Change Oil Indicator ..................................... 129
Changing A Flat Tire............................. 320, 366
Chart, Tire Sizing........................................... 367
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light)............................................................. 151
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 216
Checks, Safety .............................................. 216
Child Restraint .............................................. 198
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 201
Center Seat LATCH ................................... 207
Child Seat Installation...................... 209, 212
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt..... 208
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 199
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 202
Older Children And Child Restraints.......... 200
Seating Positions...................................... 202
Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............. 214
Cigar Lighter.................................................. 120
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 390
Cleaning
Wheels...................................................... 381
Climate Control ................................................70
Automatic ....................................................80
Manual ........................................................70
Rear......................................................78, 87
Coat Hook ..................................................... 117
Cold Weather Operation................................ 223
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 379
Computer, Trip/Travel................................... 140
Contract, Service........................................... 500
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 363
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 504
505
Cooling System..............................................361
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze).......................362
Coolant Level ............................................363
Cooling Capacity........................................393
Disposal Of Used Coolant..........................363
Drain, Flush, And Refill..............................361
Inspection ....................................... 361, 363
Points To Remember.................................363
Pressure Cap.............................................363
Radiator Cap .............................................363
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ........................ 361, 393, 394
Corrosion Protection ......................................385
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................239
Cruise Light ......................................... 148, 149
Customer Assistance .....................................499
Cybersecurity.................................................397
D
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights..................68
Daytime Running Lights................................... 63
Dealer Service ...............................................351
Defroster, Windshield....................................217
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers.............................. 68
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................150
Dimmer Switch
Headlight..................................................... 63
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)................................................350
Disable Vehicle Towing..................................342
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 363
Disturb................................................. 464, 496
Door Ajar.............................................. 142, 143
Door Ajar Light ..................................... 142, 143
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt......................................35
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .................................... 299
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System).... 469
E
Electric Brake Control System....................... 153
Anti-Lock Brake System............................ 152
Traction Control System ........................... 158
Electric Parking Brake................................... 225
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................61
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)..... 237
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 154
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 142
Emergency Gas Can Refueling...................... 339
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 301
Jacking ...................................320, 322, 366
Jump Starting ........................................... 337
Overheating.............................................. 339
Towing ...................................................... 342
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 151
Engine........................................................... 349
Air Cleaner ................................................ 353
Block Heater............................................. 224
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 224
Checking Oil Level .................................... 350
Compartment ........................................... 349
Compartment Identification...................... 349
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 394
Cooling...................................................... 361
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 216, 392
Fails To Start............................................. 223
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 223
Fuel Requirements ................................... 389
Oil ...........................................351, 393, 394
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 349
Oil Filter .................................................... 352
Oil Selection.....................................351, 393
Oil Synthetic.............................................. 352
Overheating .............................................. 339
Starting..................................................... 219
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................................... 352
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart.............................. 352
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................196, 344
Ethanol.......................................................... 390
Exhaust Gas Cautions.......................... 216, 392
Exhaust System ................................... 216, 359
Exterior Lighting ..................................... 63, 309
Exterior Lights ......................63, 218, 306, 309
11
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 505
506
F
Filters
Air Cleaner.................................................353
Air Conditioning..................................92, 354
Engine Oil ........................................ 352, 394
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................352
Flashers
Hazard Warning.........................................301
Turn Signals .................... 63, 149, 218, 309
Flash-To-Pass ........................................... 63, 64
Flat Tire Changing....................... 320, 366, 379
Flat Tire Stowage........................ 330, 366, 379
Flooded Engine Starting ................................223
Fluid Capacities .............................................393
Fluid Leaks ....................................................218
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................364
Fluid, Brake ...................................................396
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................394
Fog Lights ........................................63, 65, 310
Fog Lights, Service.........................................310
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating.................... 43
Fold-Flat Seats................................................. 35
Forward Collision Warning.............................164
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................341
Front Position Light........................................309
Fuel............................................................... 389
Additives................................................... 390
Clean Air ................................................... 390
Ethanol ..................................................... 390
Filler Cap (Gas Cap).................................. 286
Gasoline ................................................... 389
Materials Added ....................................... 390
Methanol .................................................. 390
Octane Rating.................................. 389, 394
Requirements........................................... 389
Specifications........................................... 394
Tank Capacity........................................... 393
Fuses ............................................................ 311
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).................. 109
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............................. 286
Gasoline, (Fuel)............................................. 389
Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 390
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 390
Gear Ranges................................................. 230
Glass Cleaning.............................................. 387
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 289
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating......................... 289
GVWR............................................................ 288
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water ....................... 299
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................. 301
Head Restraints ...............................................55
Headlights........................................................63
Bulb Replacement .................................... 308
Cleaning.................................................... 385
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........63
Lights On Reminder ..............................63, 65
Passing .................................................63, 64
Replacing.................................................. 308
Switch..........................................................63
Time Delay...................................................63
Washers.......................................................65
Heated Mirrors..........................................59, 61
Heater, Engine Block..................................... 224
Hill Start Assist.............................................. 157
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 291
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................. 109
Hood Prop ........................................................97
Hood Release...................................................97
Hook, Coat .................................................... 117
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 506
507
I
Ignition ............................................................ 18
Switch ......................................................... 18
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide...................................... 12
Inside Rearview Mirror............................59, 301
Instrument Cluster.........................................126
Descriptions ..............................................149
Display ......................................................127
Menu Items...............................................131
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning....................387
Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 66
Interior Appearance Care...............................386
Interior Lights .................................................. 66
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).................. 68
Inverter
Power ........................................................119
iPod/USB/MP3 Control .................................447
J
Jack Location.................................................320
Jack Operation..................................... 320, 366
Jump Starting ................................................337
K
Key Fob ...........................................................13
Arm The System .......................................... 24
Disarm The Alarm........................................ 24
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 16, 23
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................15
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) ...............................................................16
Keys.................................................................13
Replacement ...............................................23
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................63
Lane Change Assist ..................................63, 66
LaneSense.................................................... 280
Lap/Shoulder Belts....................................... 174
Latches......................................................... 218
Hood............................................................97
Lead Free Gasoline....................................... 389
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 218
Life Of Tires................................................... 377
Liftgate ............................................................99
Power ....................................................... 100
Light Bulbs........................................... 218, 309
Lighter
Cigar ......................................................... 120
Lights............................................................ 218
Air Bag....................................141, 184, 217
Battery Saver...............................................66
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 156
Brake Warning.......................................... 141
Bulb Replacement........................... 306, 309
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 311
Cruise .............................................. 148, 149
Daytime Running .........................................63
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................63
Engine Temperature Warning ................... 143
Exterior ............................................ 218, 309
Fog..................................................... 65, 310
Headlights .................................. 63, 64, 308
High Beam/Low Beam Select......................63
Instrument Cluster.......................................63
Intensity Control ..........................................67
Interior.........................................................66
Lights On Reminder ..............................63, 65
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....... 145
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness).............68
Park .......................................................... 148
Passing .................................................63, 64
Reading .......................................................66
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 143
Security Alarm .......................................... 144
Service...................................................... 306
Side Marker .............................................. 309
SmartBeams................................................64
Traction Control ........................................ 156
Turn Signals.....................63, 149, 218, 309
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................................ 143, 149
Load Floor, Cargo.......................................... 103
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode..................... 138
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 138
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 138
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor............ 138
11
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 507
508
Loading Vehicle ................................... 103, 288
Tires ..........................................................371
Low Tire Pressure System .............................167
Lubrication, Body...........................................356
Lug Nuts ........................................................388
Luggage Carrier .............................................121
M
Maintenance Free Battery .............................350
Maintenance Schedule..................................345
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) ................................................ 145, 151
Manual
Park Release.............................................340
Service ......................................................502
Map/Reading Lights........................................ 66
Marker Lights, Side .......................................309
Media Hub.....................................................468
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .................... 35
Memory Seat ..................................... 34, 35, 61
Memory Seats And Radio ................................ 35
Methanol .......................................................390
Mini-Trip Computer........................................140
Mirrors............................................................. 59
Automatic Dimming.............................. 59, 60
Electric Remote........................................... 61
Exterior Folding ........................................... 61
Heated.................................................. 59, 61
Memory .......................................................34
Outside.................................................59, 60
Rearview.............................................59, 301
Vanity ..........................................................62
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.........................................................11
Monitor, Tire Pressure System...................... 167
Mopar Parts .................................................. 501
MP3 Control.................................................. 468
Multi-Function Control Lever............................63
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period......................... 224
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 171
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 389, 394
Oil Change Indicator ..................................... 129
Reset........................................................ 129
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 352
Oil Filter, Selection........................................ 352
Oil Pressure Light.......................................... 144
Oil, Engine............................................351, 394
Capacity.................................................... 393
Change Interval ........................................ 351
Checking................................................... 350
Disposal.................................................... 352
Filter ................................................352, 394
Filter Disposal........................................... 352
Identification Logo .................................... 352
Materials Added To................................... 352
Pressure Warning Light............................. 144
Recommendation ............................351, 393
Synthetic................................................... 352
Viscosity........................................... 352, 393
Onboard Diagnostic System.......................... 150
Operating Precautions .................................. 150
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual................................. 10, 502
Outside Rearview Mirrors..........................59, 60
Overheating, Engine...................................... 339
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .................10
P
Paint Care ..................................................... 385
Parking Brake ............................................... 225
ParkSense System, Rear...................... 254, 259
Pets............................................................... 215
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 371
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 508
509
Power
Brakes.......................................................388
Inverter......................................................119
Mirrors......................................................... 61
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..............118
Seats.................................................... 48, 50
Steering.....................................................234
Power Seats
Down........................................................... 49
Forward ....................................................... 49
Rearward..................................................... 49
Up................................................................ 49
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch...................................30, 100
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................180
Preparation For Jacking.................................321
Pretensioners
Seat Belts..................................................181
R
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................376
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............363
Radio
Presets......................................................440
Radio Operation .................................. 438, 491
Rear Air Conditioning................................ 78, 87
Rear Camera .................................................284
Rear Cross Path.............................................162
Rear ParkSense System ...................... 254, 259
Rear Seat Removal.......................................... 37
Rear View.........................................................59
Reclining Front Seats.......................................36
Recreational Towing ..................................... 298
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 390
Refrigerant.................................................... 354
Release, Hood .................................................97
Reminder, Lights On ........................................63
Reminder, Seat Belt...................................... 173
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................................19
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm.............................................24
Disarm The Alarm........................................24
Programming Additional Key Fobs........16, 23
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................21
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features..................................................21
Uconnect Settings .......................................21
Remote Starting System ..................................19
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 306
Replacement Keys...........................................23
Replacement Tires........................................ 377
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 501
Restraints, Child ........................................... 198
Restraints, Head..............................................55
Roof Luggage Rack....................................... 121
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 382
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 217
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle...................... 218
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 501
Safety Information, Tire................................. 366
Safety Tips .................................................... 216
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 216
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 345
Seat Belt Reminder....................................... 143
Seat Belts ............................................ 172, 217
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 177
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 177
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ............................................ 177
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 181
Child Restraints ........................................ 198
Energy Management Feature ................... 181
Extender ................................................... 180
Front Seat...............................172, 174, 175
Inspection................................................. 217
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 175
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 176
Lap/Shoulder Belts................................... 174
Operating Instructions .............................. 175
Pregnant Women...................................... 180
Pretensioners ........................................... 181
Rear Seat.................................................. 174
Reminder.................................................. 173
11
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 509
510
Seat Belt Extender ....................................180
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................181
Untwisting Procedure ................................176
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................386
Seats ................................................. 35, 49, 53
Adjustment............................. 35, 36, 37, 49
Bench.......................................................... 37
Heated ........................................................ 53
Memory ....................................................... 34
Power ................................................... 48, 50
Rear Folding................................................ 35
Reclining ..................................................... 36
Seatback Release ................................ 35, 37
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) ............................ 43
Tilting ................................................... 35, 37
Security Alarm ...............................................144
Arm The System .......................................... 24
Disarm The System ..................................... 24
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)...................394
Sentry Key
Key Programming........................................ 23
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................. 22
Sentry Key Replacement ................................. 23
Service Assistance.........................................499
Service Contract ............................................500
Service Manuals............................................502
Shifting
Automatic Transmission............................230
Shoulder Belts...............................................174
Side View Mirror Adjustment ........................... 59
Signals, Turn........................ 63, 149, 218, 309
Siri ................................................................ 496
Sirius Satellite Radio..................................... 440
Favorites................................................... 442
Replay ...................................................... 442
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ......................................... 443
Favorites................................................... 442
Replay ...................................................... 442
SmartBeams....................................................64
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 382
Snow Tires .................................................... 379
Spare Tire Changing ..................................... 320
Spare Tire Stowage....................................... 330
Spare Tires .................................320, 379, 380
Spark Plugs................................................... 394
Specifications
Oil ............................................................. 394
Speed Control
Accel/Decel (ACC Only)............................. 243
Cancel ...................................................... 239
Resume .................................................... 239
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............ 237, 239
Starting ...................................................19, 219
Button .........................................................18
Cold Weather............................................ 223
Engine Fails To Start................................. 223
Remote........................................................19
Starting And Operating.................................. 219
Starting Procedures...................................... 219
Steering ........................................................ 234
Tilt Column...................................................58
Wheel, Heated .............................................58
Wheel, Tilt....................................................58
Steering Wheel Audio Controls...................... 467
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ........................................................ 467
Storage, Vehicle ...............................................91
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 440
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats .......................43
Stow ‘n Vac ................................................... 103
Stuck, Freeing............................................... 341
Sun Roof ..........................................................95
Sunglasses Storage ...................................... 120
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 185
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 158
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 352
System, Remote Starting .................................19
T
Telescoping Steering Column...........................58
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............90
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................................. 103
Tilt Steering Column.........................................58
Time Delay
Headlight .....................................................63
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 371
Tire Markings ................................................ 366
Tire Safety Information.................................. 366
Tire Service Kit.............................................. 330
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 510
511
Tire Stowage..................................................330
Tires...................................218, 374, 379, 383
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................377
Air Pressure...............................................374
Chains .......................................................382
Changing ......................................... 320, 366
Compact Spare .........................................379
General Information ........................ 374, 379
High Speed................................................375
Inflation Pressure......................................375
Jacking ................................... 320, 322, 366
Life Of Tires ...............................................377
Load Capacity............................................371
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ............................... 131, 146, 167
Quality Grading..........................................383
Radial........................................................376
Replacement.............................................377
Rotation ....................................................382
Safety.............................................. 366, 374
Sizes..........................................................367
Snow Tires.................................................379
Spare Tires............................. 320, 379, 380
Spinning ....................................................376
Trailer Towing............................................295
Tread Wear Indicators...............................377
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................388
To Open Hood.................................................. 97
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................294
Towing .......................................................... 289
Disabled Vehicle....................................... 342
Guide........................................................ 291
Recreational ............................................. 298
Weight ...................................................... 291
Towing Behind A Motorhome........................ 298
Traction......................................................... 299
Traction Control ............................................ 158
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)............................. 158
Trailer Towing ............................................... 289
Cooling System Tips ................................. 297
Hitches ..................................................... 291
Minimum Requirements........................... 294
Tips........................................................... 297
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 294
Wiring ....................................................... 296
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 291
Trailer Weight................................................ 291
Transaxle
Automatic ................................................. 228
Operation ................................................. 228
Transmission ................................................ 230
Automatic ........................................ 230, 365
Maintenance ............................................ 365
Transporting Pets.......................................... 215
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 377
Turn Signals.................................. 63, 149, 309
U
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity................... 465
Phone Call Features ................................. 462
Theater ..................................................... 469
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ................................... 465
Uconnect Settings .......................................21
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display .................... 398
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display.. 415
Uconnect Phone................ 456, 457, 459, 460
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................... 464
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress................ 464
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 466
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name........... 463
Call Continuation ...................................... 465
Call Controls ............................................. 463
Call Termination ....................................... 465
Cancel Command ..................................... 457
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between
The Uconnect Phone And Mobile
Phone................................................... 465
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing................ 460
11
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 511
512
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device.............461
Dial By Saying A Number...........................463
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device ...460
Far End Audio Performance ......................466
Help Command .........................................457
Join Calls ...................................................465
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite.................................................461
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress .................................464
Managing Your Favorites...........................462
Natural Speech .........................................456
Operation ..................................................456
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone ...................................................457
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device..459
Pair Additional Mobile Phones ..................459
Phonebook Download ...............................461
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............464
Power-Up...................................................466
Recent Calls ..............................................463
Redial........................................................465
To Remove A Favorite ...............................462
Toggling Between Calls .............................464
Touch-Tone Number Entry........................ 463
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone .... 465
Voice Command ....................................... 465
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call ................... 462
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .............21
Uconnect Voice Command............................ 493
Umbrella Holder............................................ 115
Uniform Tire Quality Grades.......................... 383
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .. 109
Universal Transmitter ................................... 109
Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 389
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 176
USB............................................................... 468
V
Vacuum ........................................................ 103
Stow ‘n Vac............................................... 103
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................62
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 388
Vehicle Loading ................................... 288, 371
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................11
Vehicle Storage................................................91
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ............................................12
Navigation ...................................................12
Operating Instructions .................................12
Searching User Guide..................................12
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................................... 352
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..................... 493
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)................................................. 145
Warnings And Cautions....................................10
Warranty Information .................................... 501
Washers, Windshield .................................... 350
Washing Vehicle............................................ 385
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 299
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care........................... 381
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 381
Wind Buffeting .................................................96
Window Fogging...............................................91
Windshield Defroster .................................... 217
Windshield Washers .............................. 68, 350
Fluid.......................................................... 350
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 356
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 356
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................68
Wrecker Towing............................................. 342
20_RU_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 512
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any
electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and
could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your
full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Chrysler brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment
is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
_RU_OM_EN_US
Third Edition V2
owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
mopar.com/om
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter
the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
